JP6013965B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game The state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled) is configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player can display each variable display. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the predetermined maximum delay time range from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is stopped. When a winning occurs according to the display result derived at the time, a predetermined game medium determined in accordance with the winning is paid out, and a specific winning occurs, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player. Some are configured to be in a state of giving (so-called slot machines).

  The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball, or advantageous for a player who is likely to receive a predetermined winning. Or a state where a right to become advantageous to the player is generated, or a condition for paying out game media is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in a variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, a predetermined specific display result is obtained. When the display mode is derived and displayed, “big hit” occurs. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. A big hit occurs before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction, or deformation, or when multiple symbols change synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol changes. An effect performed in a state where the possibility continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In addition, an effect of notifying that there is a high possibility that a big hit or reach (particularly super reach) will occur is called a notice effect. The reach effect is an effect when the symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol are aligned, but the notice effect is an effect that is different from the reach effect and before the symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol are aligned Naturally, it can be executed even after the symbols other than the symbols to be the final stop symbols are prepared.

  As a gaming machine that performs such a notice effect, as shown in Patent Document 1, first, a notice selection table is selected from a plurality of kinds of notice selection tables, and then one of the selected notice selection tables is selected. It has been proposed to determine a notice effect to be executed in two stages by selecting a notice effect.

JP-A-2002-239122 (FIGS. 22 to 25)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in the development of the gaming machine, when it is desired to change the distribution rate at which a specific notice effect is executed, the selection rate of the notice selection table and each notice selection table There is a problem that it takes a long time to perform the change work because the selection rate of the notice effect in the must be changed.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve work efficiency when it is desired to change a distribution rate at which a specific notice effect is executed.

  The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the above problems. The reference numerals used in the description of the best mode for carrying out the invention and the drawings to be described later are appended in parentheses for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to the appended description.

First, the invention according to means 1
A variable display unit (first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol) that displays a plurality of types of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, production symbol) that can be identified and displays the display result. When a predetermined display result (big hit symbol) predetermined as a display result is derived and displayed on the symbol display device 8b and the effect display device 9), control is performed to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine)
Predetermining means for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed (part for executing the processing of S61 in the gaming control microcomputer 560);
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern of identification information based on the determination result of the prior determination means (part for executing the processing of S105 in the game control microcomputer 560);
Based on the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means, a notice effect determining means (effect) for determining the notice effect to be executed from among a plurality of notice effects for notifying that there is a possibility of being controlled to the specific gaming state. A part for executing the processing of S518A in the control microcomputer 100);
Notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means (a portion for executing the processing of S846 to S855 in the effect control microcomputer 100);
The notice effect determining means (notification type determination means (effect) for determining which of the notice effect types to be executed among the plurality of kinds of notice effect types classified based on the aspect of the notice effect. A part for executing the processing of S570 in the control microcomputer 100) and a notice determining means for determining the notice effect to be executed among the notice effects belonging to the notice effect type determined by the notice type determining means (effect) The control microcomputer 100 executes a process of S573, S576, S579, S581, and S583).
The plurality of the notice effects are the notice effects that perform a plurality of effects from the first stage effect to the multiple stage effects according to a predetermined order, and controlled to the specific gaming state. Includes a step-up notice effect in which the effect is performed up to a predetermined stage effect at a higher rate than when not controlled to the specific gaming state,
The step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect in which a plurality of effects performed in the step-up notice effect are a first aspect, and a plurality of effects aspects performed in the step-up notice effect. Including a second step-up notice effect that is a second aspect different from the first aspect,
When the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are controlled to the specific gaming state, the ratio of the effect to the stage determined in advance is different,
The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed in parallel during variable display of identification information,
The notice effect determining means is:
Determining the step-up notice effect based on the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means (FIG. 65);
When the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means is the first specific variable display pattern (non-reach), the first step-up notice effect is determined when the first step-up notice effect is determined. Selection of the first stage or higher is restricted as the stage of the stage effect in the one-step-up notice effect (in FIG. 68 for determining the first step-up notice effect, in the case of non-reach, the notice effect C or higher) A first limiting means in which the selection ratio of the production mode to be developed is 0)
When the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is the second specific variable display pattern (non-reach or non-normal reach), when the second step-up notice effect is determined, the second step The selection of the second stage or higher is restricted as the stage of the staged effect in the up notice effect (in FIG. 69 for determining the second step up notice effect, in the case of non-reach, the notice effect Z or z or more small selection ratio of the effect mode of development, even in the case of normal reach out, notice a small selection ratio of representation embodiment develop into more effect Z or z) observed including a second limiting unit,
Wherein a timing at which the timing of stages of the first step-up announcement attraction changes the second step up stage flop announcement attraction changes are gaming machines, wherein different.
According to this, the notice type determining means determines which notice effect belonging to the notice effect type among a plurality of kinds of notice effect types classified based on the kind of the notice effect, and the notice determining means Since the notice effect to be executed is determined from among the notice effects belonging to the determined notice effect type, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when it is desired to change the distribution rate at which the specific notice effect is executed. In addition, since the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed in parallel during variable display, the interest can be improved. Further, in the step-up notice effect of multiple systems, if the notice effect is stepped up (changed or developed) to a predetermined stage, the specific variable display pattern is not executed or is difficult to execute. As a result of step-up (change, development), the expectation of jackpots can be increased, and the fun of gaming can be further improved.
Incidentally, one of the least well of the first step-up announcement attraction and the second step-up announcement attraction, even after the reach occurs, may be one possible change in the phase.

Further, the invention according to means 2 is the gaming machine (pachinko machine) described in means 1, wherein the identification information is based on the fact that the prior decision means has decided not to control the specific gaming state. Reach determination means for determining whether or not the variable display state is set to a predetermined reach state (the part for executing the processing of S95 to S97 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the determination result of the prior determination means or the Based on at least one of the determination results by the reach determination means, the variation pattern type determination means (S101 in the game control microcomputer 560) determines the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern of the identification information belongs. The portion for executing the processing of S102) and the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern type determination means The variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern of the identification information among the variation patterns included separately (the portion for executing the processing of S103 to S105 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the determination result of the variation pattern determining means Correspondingly, there is provided a variation effect execution means (a portion for executing the processing of S520 and S845 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a variation effect including at least a variation display of the identification information. It is a gaming machine.
According to this, the variation pattern type determining means determines which variation pattern type to be executed among the plurality of types of variation pattern types, and the variation pattern determining means determines the determined variation pattern type. Since the variation pattern to be executed is determined from among the variation pattern effects belonging to, the work efficiency can be improved when it is desired to change the distribution rate at which the specific variation pattern is executed.

The invention according to means 3 is the gaming machine (pachinko machine) described in means 2, wherein the change pattern type determining means is determined not to control to the specific gaming state by the prior determining means, In addition, based on the determination that the reach state is not controlled by the reach determination unit, the variation pattern type belongs to a variation pattern type to which a specific variation pattern that executes a predetermined specific effect (slip or pseudo-continuity) belongs. (The variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-3 in the processing of S100 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the variation pattern determination unit is determined by the variation pattern type determination unit The variation pattern is determined from the specific variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type (for game control) In the process of S105 in the microcomputer 560, the variation pattern is determined as non-reach PA1-4 (slip) or non-reach PA1-5 (pseudo-continuous)), and the variation effect execution means is determined by the variation pattern determination means. The gaming machine is characterized by executing a specific effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern.
According to this, even if it is not controlled to the specific gaming state and is not controlled to the reach state, the specific effect (pseudo-run, slip) corresponding to the specific variation pattern is executed, so the occurrence of the specific gaming state The expectation for can be improved. Further, the variation pattern type determining means determines which of the plurality of types of variation pattern types the specific variation pattern belonging to is to be executed, and the variation pattern determining means specifies the identification belonging to the determined variation pattern type. Since the specific variation pattern to be executed is determined from the variation patterns, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when it is desired to change the distribution rate at which the specific variation pattern is executed.

In the invention according to means 4, a game can be started by setting a predetermined bet number for one game using a game medium, and a plurality of types of identification information for winning can be varied. In a gaming machine (slot machine) in which one game is completed by deriving the display result to the winning variable display section to be displayed and winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the winning variable display section Whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including a specific winning accompanied by a transition to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player before the display result of the winning variable display unit is derived. A winning predetermination means to be determined, a winning derivation control means for controlling the winning variable display section to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the winning predetermination means, and a specific winning for the specific winning display When the result is derived to the winning variable display unit, the specific game state control means for controlling to the specific game state, and the variable display unit for effect that variably displays a plurality of types of effect identification information that can identify each And a state advantageous to the player (for example, big bonus, AT / CT / RT / ART) when the display result of the effect identification information on the effect variable display unit is a predetermined special display result. Etc.) and an effect that decides whether or not to make the special display result before the display result of the effect identification information is derived and displayed. A pre-determining means for determining a pre-announcement effect to be executed from among the plurality of pre-notification effects for notifying that there is a possibility that the special display result is obtained Determining means, a notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means, and an operation means operable by the player, wherein the notice effect determining means is in the form of the notice effect. The notice type determining means for determining which notice effect belonging to which of the plurality of kinds of notice effect types classified based on the notice effect type to be executed, and the notice belonging to the notice effect type determined by the notice type determining means A notice determining means for determining the notice effect to be executed from among the effects, wherein the plurality of notice effects are preliminarily determined in accordance with a predetermined order during one variable display of the effect identification information. Step-up notice effect that informs step by step that the special display result may be obtained by changing the effect one or more times at a predetermined timing, and the effect The game machine further includes an operation advance notice effect for notifying that the special display result may be obtained based on an operation of the operation means during one variable display of the identification information for use.
According to this, the notice type determining means determines which notice effect belonging to the notice effect type among a plurality of kinds of notice effect types classified based on the kind of the notice effect, and the notice determining means Since the notice effect to be executed is determined from among the notice effects belonging to the determined notice effect type, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when it is desired to change the distribution rate at which the specific notice effect is executed.

The invention according to means 5 is the gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine) described in any one of means 1 to 4, wherein the notice effect determining means is not executed simultaneously during the same period during variable display. Regarding the notice effect (second step-up notice effect, button notice effect), the notice effect type of the notice effect to be executed is determined by the notice type determination means, and the notice effect that can be executed at the same time during the variable display ( For the first step-up notice effect, the notice effect to be executed is determined without relying on the notice type determining means (the portion for executing the processing of S572, S575, S578, and S580 in the effect control microcomputer 100). Is a gaming machine characterized by
According to this, since the notice effects that are not executed simultaneously during the same period during variable display are classified according to the notice effect types, it is necessary to set data (for example, set the distribution rate to 0) to prohibit each other. Data setting is easy.

The invention according to means 6 is the gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine) described in any one of means 1 to 5, wherein the step-up notice effect is a first step-up notice effect (notice effect A). , B, C, D, E, e can be executed, a first step-up notice effect: see FIG. 82), and a second step-up notice effect different from the first step-up notice effect (notice effects X, Y, Second step-up notice effect capable of executing Z, z: see FIG. 83 to FIG. 85), and the notice effect executing means uses the step-up notice effect as the notice effect executed by the notice effect determining means. When determined, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the step-up notice effect (shown in FIG. 78). In the example, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed simultaneously during the high-speed fluctuation period of the effect symbol.As a specific example, as shown in FIGS. At the same time, the notice effect A of the first step-up notice effect and the notice effect X of the second step-up notice effect are started at the same time. Thereafter, the notice effect A changes from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the first step-up notice effect. The second step-up notice effect changes from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y, and from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z and z).
According to this, the step-up notice effect includes the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect different from the first step-up notice effect, and the notice effect executing means is configured as the step-up notice effect. Since the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed simultaneously in the same period during variable display, a plurality of step-up notice effects (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect, second Step-up notice effect) can be executed at the same time to improve interest.

Further, the invention according to means 7 is the gaming machine (pachinko machine, slot machine) described in means 6, wherein the notice effect execution means ends the first step-up notice effect (for example, the notice effect B is the first in the notice effect B). At a predetermined timing after the completion of the step-up notice effect, control for changing the effect (for example, notice effects Z, z) in the second step-up notice effect is executed (for example, FIG. 87 (3-3) to ( As shown in 3-5), when the notice effect B is finished, the first step-up notice effect is once ended, and thereafter, the second step up is shown as shown in FIGS. 88 (3-6) and (3-8). (1) A suggestion effect and a notice effect z in the notice effect, or a notice effect Z in the second step-up notice effect as shown in FIG. 89 (3-11). That.
According to this, since the notice effect execution means is configured to execute control to change the effect in the second step up notice effect at a predetermined timing after the first step up notice effect ends. Even if one step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect) ends, the other step-up notice effect (second step-up notice effect) may continue to be executed. The expectation for occurrence can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of operation | movement of a movable member. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a jackpot determination table, a jackpot type determination table, and a probability variation promotion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area). It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a design fluctuation control pattern table. FIG. 45 shows an effect control pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific production | presentation setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation performed according to the content of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notice classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a movable-object notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a button notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for selecting another notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a timing diagram which shows the execution timing of various notice effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern (notice pattern) which develops from step (Y) to step (Z) or (z) in the 2nd step-up notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each notice effect in a 1st step-up notice, and the content of each notice effect in a 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd step-up notice. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example in which the 1st step-up notice and the 2nd step-up notice are executed simultaneously in the same period during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in which the 1st step-up advance notice and the 2nd step-up advance notice are performed simultaneously in the same period during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in which the 1st step-up advance notice and the 2nd step-up advance notice are performed simultaneously in the same period during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in which the 1st step-up advance notice and the 2nd step-up advance notice are performed simultaneously in the same period during variable display. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → End → D → E, as the second step-up notice, the notice effect X → Once finish → Z, the movable object notice is executed at the first notice timing and the second notice timing. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the notice effect which is. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → End → D → E, as the second step-up notice, the notice effect X → Once finish → Z, the movable object notice is executed at the first notice timing and the second notice timing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a notice effect which is. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → End → D → E, as the second step-up notice, the notice effect X → Once finish → Z, the movable object notice is executed at the first notice timing and the second notice timing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a notice effect which is. As the first step-up notice, the notice timing A → B → end once → D → E, without executing the notice effect as the second step-up notice, and the notice timing in a specific example of the notice effect where the other system liquid crystal notice is executed is shown. It is a timing diagram. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a notice effect in which another notice of liquid crystal notice is executed without a notice effect being executed as a second step up notice, without notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as a first step up notice is there. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a notice effect in which another notice of liquid crystal notice is executed without a notice effect being executed as a second step up notice, without notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as a first step up notice is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a mail notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a card notice. Notice effect A → B → End → D → E as the first step up notice, No execution for the notice effect as the second step up notice, Specific notice notice effect executed at a later timing as the first mail notice It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in an example. As a first step-up notice, a specific example of the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E, a notice effect X as a second step-up notice, and a notice effect executed at a later timing as a first mail notice It is explanatory drawing. As a first step-up notice, a specific example of the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E, a notice effect X as a second step-up notice, and a notice effect executed at a later timing as a first mail notice It is explanatory drawing. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → Temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the card notice is early as the card notice It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the notice effect performed by. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → Temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the card notice is early as the card notice It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect performed by. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → Temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the card notice is early as the card notice It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect performed by. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → Temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the card notice is early as the card notice It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the notice effect performed by. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → Temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the card notice is early as the card notice It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect performed by. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → Temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the card notice is early as the card notice It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect performed by. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → Temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the card notice is early as the card notice It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect performed by. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → Temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the card notice is early as the card notice It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect performed by. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd modification of the execution timing of various notice effects.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The circular display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the symbol display area, there are “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas (see symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in FIG. 82, etc.). The display screen of the device 9 may not be fixed, and the three areas of the symbol display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning port) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed), and , A state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established in the order in which the start prizes are generated regardless of the prizes in the first start prize slot 13 and the second start prize slot 14. The variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to one of winning in the winning opening 13 and winning in the second start winning opening 14. For example, when giving priority to winning in the first start winning opening 13, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed. For example, even when the second reserved memory number is not zero, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed until the first reserved memory number becomes zero.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) is performed. There is provided a second decorative symbol display 9b. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display. .

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display 9b. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big-hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. In other words, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b, a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the 1st special symbol reservation memory display 18a and the 2nd special symbol reservation memory display 18b are provided, the total reservation memory display part 18c does not necessarily need to be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be won at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display 9a. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when it is informed that it is a probable big hit or a probable promotion effect (a special effect indicating promotion to a probable state), the gaming state is shifted to a high probability state. At the same time, the game ball is controlled to be in a high base state that is controlled so as to make it easier for the game ball to start and win (that is, the execution conditions for variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established). Transition. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, or when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. (In other words, the digestion of the stored memory becomes faster), and as a result, it is easier to start a winning and the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state) (high base) Transition to a state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data indicating the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 is configured to select a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection selection function), numerical data update rule selection setting function, and numerical data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 forming the big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 9a and the second decorative symbol display device 9b that variably display the decorative symbols, and the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbols.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 101 including an effect control CPU 101 and an RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. In addition, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data that indicates the output form of sound effects or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the operation of the movable member. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the operation of the movable member 78 when the re-change effect (pseudo-continuous effect) in the effect display device 9 is executed is shown. In the re-change effect, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 4A (the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are stopped) (FIG. 4). (Refer to (B) and (C)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 4D). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol re-varies (see FIG. 4E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol is finally stopped (confirmed). (See FIG. 4F). In the example shown in FIG. 4, the movable member 78 operates (operates so as to return to the original position (outside the display screen) after entering the display screen of the effect display device 9) during the first variation period, and the first variation occurs. The movable member 78 also operates during the subsequent re-variation period. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 4 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. Then, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-variation effect ends, but when the re-change effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) is initialized) (S4), the RAM 55 is made accessible. Set (S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (in S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure restoration designation command (power failure restoration 1 designation command) as an initialization command at the time of power supply restoration to the effect control board 80 (S43). Then, the process proceeds to S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification is performed. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination or the like is one round (the minimum value that can be taken by the random number) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. Display control processing for performing display control of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a. Execute (S30). Specifically, payout control is performed according to winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the second special symbol display 8b in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. 2 Perform variable display of special symbols.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of S21 to S33 (excluding S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo continuous chance. In the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9, any one of the pseudo-ream chance items GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The effect symbols constituting the are temporarily stopped and displayed. The “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Depending on the reach state, after the reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not become reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Or the reach effect is not executed, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9.

  When the small special symbol “5” is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit”. After the effect symbols are variably displayed in the same manner as in the case of “”, the stop symbols in the symbol display areas 9L and 9R of the predetermined “non-reach” (for example, “left” and “right”) do not match. May be displayed in a stopped manner, or a stopped symbol that is a predetermined reach combination may be displayed in a stopped manner. The display effect on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is a variable display mode of “small hit”. That's it.

  FIG. 8 shows the variation patterns of the effect symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and the case of “reach” when the variable display result is an outlier symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-5 and non-reach PB1- are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-6, super PB3-1 to super PB3- 3. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-5 which is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed twice. Re-variation is performed twice or three times for a variation pattern that is used for reaching and accompanied by a pseudo-ream effect.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a variation pattern of an effect symbol prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4-1 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. ~ Super PA4-6, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-3, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-3, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-3, Super PD1-1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 Also, variation patterns of super PE1-2, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 9, re-variation is performed twice, three times, or four times for a variation pattern that is used when sudden sudden change is not a big hit and accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. For the fluctuation pattern of the special PG 1-3 used in the case of sudden probability big hit and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed twice or three times.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(2-1) Random 2-1 (MR2-1): Determine the type of jackpot (probability big hit, sudden probability change big hit, normal big hit) (for big hit type judgment)
(2-2) Random 2-2 (MR2-2): Determines whether or not to reach (for reach determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6 (MR6): Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the initial value of random 5)
(7) Random 7 (MR7): Determines the pattern of pseudo-continuous production (for determining pseudo-continuous pattern)

  In S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 generates a (2-1) big hit type determination random number and a (5) normal symbol determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, these are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2-2, random 3, random 4, random 7) or initial value random numbers (random 6). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 11 (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 11 (B) are set in the normal jackpot determination table. Each numerical value described in the right column of (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 11 (B) are set. The numerical values described in FIGS. 11A and 11B are the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value. Hereinafter, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value may be collectively expressed as “big hit determination value”.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number is shown in FIGS. If it matches any of the big hit judgment values shown in B), it is decided to make a big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit or sudden probable big hit) or small hit for the special symbol. Note that “probability” shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B indicates the probability (ratio) of big hit or small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, but the first special symbol display 8a or the second special It may also be determined whether the stop symbol in the symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the jackpot type to “normal jackpot”, “random jackpot” based on a random number (random 2-1) for determining the jackpot type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random 2-1, and determination values corresponding to each of “normal jackpot”, “probability change big hit”, and “sudden probability change big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the random value 2-1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  12A to 12F and FIG. 13G are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on (Random 3). Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state, and the determination result of the jackpot type.

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G includes a variation pattern type determination table depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, or “sudden probability big hit”. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3), which is normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, super CB3-1, super CB3-2, special CA4-1, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 is set.

  For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit” and the big hit type is Assignment of decision values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 is different from the variation pattern type determination table 132B for big hits shown in FIG. 12B used in the case of “probable big hit”. . In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation value type of the super CA3-3. The judgment value is not assigned. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4 is not assigned. Judgment value is assigned.

  Thus, when the gaming state is any one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state (when in the normal state) When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D to 132F (selected when the probability variation state is selected) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B and 132G (selected during the short time state) are compared, Accordingly, the assignment of the judgment value to each variation pattern type is different. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment tables 132C, 132F, 132G used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4- When the big hit types such as 2, special CC4-1 and special CC4-2 are other than “sudden probability change big hit”, the judgment value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, when the control is made to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. Can be determined.

  When the big hit type is determined to be “normal big hit”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 12A is used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the short time state. 132A and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 12D used when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. Is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3. It is not done. In this way, when the big hit type is determined as one of “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, or “suddenly probable big hit”, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132D selected according to the gaming state. (Selected for “normal big hit”), variation pattern type determination table 132B, 132E for big hit (selected for “probable big hit”), variation pattern type determination table 132C, 132F, 132G for big hit (“suddenly promiscuous big hit”) If the game state is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state, the determination value allocation to each variation pattern type is different. In addition, determination values may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied. it can.

  FIGS. 14A to 14C are explanatory diagrams showing small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C indicate that when the variable display result is determined to be a small hit symbol, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short time state. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for variation pattern type determination, and includes special CA4-1, special CB4-1, The judgment value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of the special CC4-1 is included.

  The variation pattern type of the special CA 4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 14A is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 14B is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 14C is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. Thus, the variation pattern types of special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1 are common when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit” and when the variable display result is “small hit”. The variation pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 12 (C), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. 12 (F), which is used when the big hit type is “sudden probability change big hit”, FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in FIG. 13G is set to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  FIGS. 15A to 15C are explanatory diagrams showing reach determination tables 134A to 134C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “off”. -2) is a table that is referred to for determination based on (2). Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short time state. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1. −1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached, reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 The determination value corresponding to any of the determination results indicating the reach state is included.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is set to the non-reach HA 1-1 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0”. Assigned, a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. It has been. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “2”, is non-reach. Assigned to HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “1”, which are larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. 230 ”is assigned to non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, “1” to “235”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A range determination value is assigned to non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state as compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIGS. 16A to 16C are explanatory diagrams showing reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C stored in the ROM 54. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C indicate the change pattern type based on the random number (random 3) for determining the change pattern type when it is determined to change the variable display state of the effect symbol to the reach state. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, and the reach use is determined in accordance with the determination result indicating reach HB2-1. The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HC2-1 is selected. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a determination result indicating that the reach state is set to reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type, which is normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. Data (determination value) for determining any of the fluctuation pattern types.

  For example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 16A, the value (determination value) in the range of “1” to “128” corresponds to the determination result indicating that the reach is HA2-1. It is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, and other values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result to reach reach 2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in response to the determination result that the reach HA2-3 is selected, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. The reach HA 2-1 is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2) according to the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. The judgment value to be assigned is assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a determination value corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “3” to “8”. With these settings, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”) compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And, the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach effect other than “normal”. If the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  17A to 17C are explanatory diagrams showing non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are based on a random number (random 3) for determining a variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not set to the reach state. It is a table referred in order to determine the type as one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. The table is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination results of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 or non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether it is non-reach HC1-2, and non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach It includes data (determination value) corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  FIGS. 18, 19A and 19B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, and the variation pattern type is selected as the super table. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result to select one of CB3-1 to super CB3-2, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-. 1, the hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” or “small hit” is included.

  20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B determine the variation pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each deviation variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Depending on the determination result, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as the usage table.

  The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is “reach”.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 20, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-5 corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern (see FIG. 8) for executing the specific effect. By such setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the variable display result of the effect symbol is “out” and the determination that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. Making a decision to be one of the fluctuation patterns of reach PA1-5 and executing a specific effect (effect of non-reach PA1-4 ("slip") or effect of non-reach PA1-5 ("pseudo-run")) Can do.

  Also, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-1, and assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-2 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-2. It has been.

  Then, with respect to the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 including non-reach PA1-5, a random number (random 3 for determining the variation pattern type) in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. ), Which is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, a determination value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1, and “230” to the non-reach HA 1-2. ”To“ 241 ”are assigned, determination values in the range of“ 231 ”to“ 241 ”are assigned to the non-reach HA1-3, and“ 237 ”to the non-reach HA1-4. A determination value in the range of “241” is assigned, and a determination value in the range of “237” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. Further, for the non-reach HA 1-1, the reach determination random number (random 2-2) corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0” in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. A determination value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned. For the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for determination of reach (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “217” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “220” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the numbers to be compared with the values of the random numbers for reach determination (random 2-2) corresponding to the numbers of reserved storage “3” and “4” ( Determination value) and a determination value in the range of “1” to “230” is assigned, and for the non-reach HA1-4, the reserved storage number is “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134A. Is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and a determination value in the range of “1” to “235” is assigned. Accordingly, when the number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number of reserved memories is “0”. . Further, when the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, the non-reach CA1-4 is compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1” or “2”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type becomes lower. Further, when the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, non-reach PA 1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 including the lower becomes lower.

  In addition, in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 17C, the reach type is not the non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type including the non-reach PA 1-5 (see FIG. 20). In the case of the reach HC1-1, a determination value in the range of “235” to “241” (a numerical value to be compared with the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type) is assigned, and the reach type is non-reach. In the case of HC1-2, determination values in the range of “234” to “241” are assigned. Further, in the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 15C, the determination value (random number for reach determination (random 2-2) assigned to the non-reach HC 1-1 when the reserved storage number is “2” or more. ) And the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HC 1-2 when the reserved storage number is “0” or “1” (“1”). ”To“ 231 ”). In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 17C, in the case of non-reach HC1-1, the non-reach HC1 than the determination value assigned to the non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type. In the case of -2, since the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CC1-3 is smaller, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or more, the number of reserved memories is " Compared to the case of “0” or “1”, the ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CC1-3 including non-reach PA1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is lower.

  Note that, when the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A illustrated in FIG. 20 is used, only non-reach PA1-5 can be selected as a variation pattern including “pseudo-continuous”, but a plurality of types including “pseudo-continuous” can be selected. The shift variation pattern determination table 138A may be configured so that the variation pattern can be selected.

  In the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 8, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. Is 3.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of PA1-5 is 16.70 seconds. In other words, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the number of reserved storage is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number is less than “3”. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 21, the variation pattern for executing the “normal” reach effect such as the normal PA2-1 to the normal PA2-4, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the change pattern type of super CA2-2, the change pattern for executing reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-3, or the reach effect such as super PA3-4 to super PA3-6. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, random numbers for variation pattern determination (random 4) are added to the variation patterns for executing the reach effect β1 such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-3. ) Is assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared.

  Further, for example, for a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, such as a variation pattern of super PA3-3, super PA3-6, and super PB3-3, the effect design after the pseudo-continuous variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-3 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, this corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-6 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the variation pattern determination table 138B. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB3-3 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 or the super CB2-1 in the outlier variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned.

  22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 22 shows a variation pattern used at the time of loss, and FIG. 23 shows a variation pattern used at the time of hit. The pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 includes super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4, which are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-continuous. -3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3 (see FIGS. 8 and 9) are set. The determination value corresponds to a specific variation pattern. Note that there are a plurality of super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3. There are fluctuation patterns of the number of re-variations, but for non-reach PA1-5, the number of re-variations (number of pseudo-variations) including the initial variation (the first pseudo variation) is only one type of two. No judgment value is assigned. That is, in practice, in the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140, data regarding non-reach PA1-5 is not set.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the first decorative symbol display unit 9a or the second decorative symbol display unit 9b to start the decorative variable display, thereby providing an effect display device. In step 9, control is performed so as to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the decorative symbols and the production symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are specified as the display results. It is called a command.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbols (and decoration symbols) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of a big hit game or the start of a small hit game (a big hit start designation command or a small hit start designation command: a fanfare designation command). is there. The big hit start designation command or the small hit start designation command includes a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command according to the type or small hit. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game, and also designates an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot has been a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, ending the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (Big jackpot end 2 specifying command: ending 2 specifying command). is there. The command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / suddenly probable big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change game.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the total pending storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be specified by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 24, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the variable pattern command and the display result specifying command are displayed in a variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator. An effect display device 9 that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b and that produces an effect in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts, it is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are generated by the effect control microcomputer 100 by the first special symbol display 8a. Whether the first design symbol display unit 9a that performs variable display of the first design as a design for decoration (production) during the variable display time of the design changes the design of the design, by the second special design display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variable display time of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that a game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start winning port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13. If the second start port switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (S311 and S312). Then, any one of S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of a special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total reserved storage number). The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. In case of small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset when the big hit game or the small hit game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Display result specifying command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol changing process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed to S304. To a value corresponding to (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 or 8 in this example) corresponding to S305 or S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbols and decorative symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting a round display effect control command during the big hit game state or the small hit game to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. When all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that although the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game when starting the first round.

  Small hit release processing (S309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (8 in this example). When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (S310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 27A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning award 13 or the second start Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the winning opening 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 27B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (S215). In the process of S215, a random R (big hit determination random number) and a random number 2-1 (see FIG. 10) that is a software random number are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start winning designation command (S216). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (S217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a total pending storage number designation command indicating the total pending storage number based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (S218). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start winning designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S29).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 13a is on (see S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S223). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area) (S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (S225). In the process of S225, random R (a big hit determination random number) and random 2-1 (see FIG. 10) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start winning designation command (S226). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter by 1 (S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a total pending storage number designation command based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (S228). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the second start winning designation command.

  In addition, you may implement | achieve the process of S213-218 and the process of S223-228 by one common routine. In that case, the CPU 56 first sets data indicating “first” when detecting that the first start port switch 13a is turned on, and indicates that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. When data is detected, data indicating “second” is set, and the common storage routine selects the reserved memory number buffer (first reserved memory number buffer or second reserved memory number buffer) according to the set data. Or a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) is selected.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 27A) is data indicating “first”. (S52). If it is data indicating “first”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “first 1 "is set (S53). If it is not data indicating “first”, that is, if it is data indicating “second”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (S54).

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is always extracted is the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is executed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is executed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S310 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (big hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module (S61). The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 11) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining that it is a jackpot or a small hit if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a probability change jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 11A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 11A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 11A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (probability big hit or normal big hit). . When it is determined to be a big hit (S61), the process proceeds to S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game, is determined to be a normal big hit, and is reset in the process of ending the big hit game.

  If the random R value does not match any of the big hit determination values, it is checked whether the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values (S62). If they match, a small hit flag is set (S63). Then, the process proceeds to S75. If it does not coincide with the small hit determination value, the process proceeds to S75 as it is.

  In S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11C is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (S72). The type corresponding to the value corresponding to the random number (random 2-1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area ("normal big hit", "probable big hit" or "sudden probability big hit") is the big hit type (S73). Further, the data indicating the determined jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly probable big hit”, “1”, which becomes the big round big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, “3” or “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91).

  When the jackpot flag is set, the table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types is used as the table according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the use variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected (S92). Then, the process proceeds to S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the small hit flag is set, a small hit variation pattern is used as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected (S93, S94). Then, the process proceeds to S101.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the table selection rule shown in FIG. 15 (D) is based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state. Accordingly, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected as a table used to determine whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbols is set to the reach state (S95). Further, random 2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 2-2 (S96). Then, the CPU 56 is in the reach state corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 2-2 in the area corresponding to the reserved storage number (the value of the reserved storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Based on the data indicating presence / absence, whether or not to reach, the type of effect when not reaching, or the type of reach when reaching is determined (S97). Note that the value before being decremented by the process of S53 may be used as the reserved storage number used in the process of S97.

  If it is decided to reach, a plurality of variation pattern types are selected according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1 or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of S97. One of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a table used for determining one of the types (S99). If it is decided not to reach, the types of effects determined in the process of S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1) Or, according to the non-reach HC1-2), one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types ( S100). Then, the process proceeds to S101.

  In S101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3. Then, based on the extracted random 3 value, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process of S92, S94, S99, or S100 (S102).

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in S102, the CPU 56 uses hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C as the tables used for determining any one of a plurality of variation patterns. One of the tables 138A and 138B is selected (S103). Further, the value of random 4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (S104). Based on the extracted random value 4, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of S103 (S105).

  As a variation pattern, a variation pattern including super-rendition production other than non-reach PA1-5 (super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, If the super PB 4-3, super PB 5-3, or special PG 1-3) has been determined (S106A), the CPU 56 extracts the value of random 7 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating the random 7 To extract. Then, based on the extracted random 7 value, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 is referred to, and the variation pattern including the pseudo-continuous effect is determined as one of a plurality of types. (S106B). That is, the number of re-variation executions (including the first pseudo variation) in the pseudo-continuous performance is determined. In addition, the variation time for executing the pseudo-continuous effect is determined by the process of S106B.

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (S107). For example, the start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (S302) (S109).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (see FIG. 24) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S110). If not set, the process proceeds to S116. When the big hit flag is set, when the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (S111, S112). When the type of jackpot is a sudden probability change jackpot, control is performed to transmit a display result 4 designation command (S113, S114). When neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit is found, control for transmitting a display result 2 designation command is performed (S115).

  When the CPU 56 confirms that the small hit flag is set in the processing of S116, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (S117). When the small hit flag is not set, control for transmitting a display result 1 designation command is performed (S118).

  Then, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that 1 is subtracted from the total pending storage number is transmitted (S119). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 stores the transmitted display result specifying command in the effect symbol type storage area in the RAM 55.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (S303) (S120).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (S125). When the variable time timer times out (S126), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S304). Update (S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (S134), and performs control to transmit a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. Whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (S136). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit and a probable big hit (15 round big hit) and 2 times in case of a sudden big change big hit (2 round big hit)) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. (S137). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) (S138).

  In S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (S140). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, the time reduction flag is reset (S142). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (S143). If the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command to the production control microcomputer 100 (S144). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (S145). Further, the number of times of opening (2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (S146). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S308) (S147). If the small hit flag is not set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S148).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (S305). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S403). Note that the CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 controls to open the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (S404) and decrements the value of the number-of-opening counter (S405).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the maximum time that the big prize opening can be opened in each round is set in the big prize opening control timer (S406). For example, in the case of 15 round big hit, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the step large winning opening opening process (S306) (S415).

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (S306) in the special symbol process. In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by 1 (S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (S421). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by one (S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 controls to drive the solenoid 21 to close the big prize opening (S435). ). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the opening number counter (S438). When the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates the post-big prize opening after-opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the round is completed). ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S439). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval period) is set in the big prize opening control timer (S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is opened. The value is updated according to the preprocessing (S305) (S441). The interval period is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit, it may be shorter than 15R big hit.

  When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the big hit end time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit game has ended in the effect display device 9) in the big prize opening control timer. (S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S307) (S443).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (S151), and a control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (S152). Here, if it is a probable big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent, if it is suddenly a probable big hit, a small hit / suddenly probable big hit end designation command is sent, and if it is none, the big hit ends 1 Send a designated command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (S153), and the processing is ended. Note that the process of S152 may be executed before S442 in the special winning opening opening process.

  In S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot (S158).

  If the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change flag is set and the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state (S161). Then, the process proceeds to S162. If neither the probability variation big hit nor sudden probability variation big hit is found, the time reduction flag is set (S162), and for example, 100 is set in the time reduction number counter (S163). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S164).

  Note that although the timers and flags to be handled are different, the processing for pre-opening small hits in S308 is the same as the processing for pre-opening big hits in S305. This is a process, and the small hit end pre-processing in S310 is the same as the big hit end process in S307.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed during variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 38 to 41, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown by a rectangle. 38 to 41 show a part of the display screen of the circular effect display device 9 shown in FIG. Further, the characters as the production information attached to the production symbols are also omitted. FIG. 38 shows an effect produced by the control of the microcomputer 100 for effect control when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, when the specific effect is not executed, and when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display device 9. FIG. When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect is not executed as shown in FIGS. 38 (C1) and (C2). When the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 is designated, a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 38 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-5 is designated, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects as shown in FIGS. 38 (D1) to (D6) are executed. 38 (D1) to 38 (D6) show simplified pseudo-continuous effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38A, for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. In all, the production design changes. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, corresponding to the determination that the effect symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, FIG. A stop display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. If the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern is always determined to be the slip TP1-1. Then (see FIG. 52), the “slip” specific effect is performed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, which causes the effect symbol to change again at high speed. Therefore, the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. When a specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, when an effect symbol of “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, an effect symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Done.

  After that, when the specific effect is not executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (C1), the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in 38 (C2), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). Is done. At this time, the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C are determined as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (D1), the “7” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (D2), by stopping the display of the “6” effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a fluctuation change display of the effect symbols is performed, and then the effect symbols are changed again in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as shown in FIG. 38 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (D4) to (D6), the effect symbols “6”, “7”, and “4” are sequentially applied in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the effect symbol which is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the “5” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Thus, as shown in FIG. 38 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol “7” is displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is determined based on, for example, the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (see FIG. 38). 47). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E4), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped. Displayed (final stop display).

  39 to 41 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display operation examples in the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (A), for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display. In all, the production design changes. After that, as shown in FIG. 39B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol display area 9L of “left”.

  For example, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIGS. 39C1 to 39C3, “Left” and After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R and then stopped and displayed. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so as to reach the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA 4-3, as shown in FIGS. 39D1 to 39D, all symbols are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous change) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Thereafter, the effect symbols “6” are displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R and are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), so that the variable display state of the effect symbols becomes the reach state.

  When the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 39 (C3) or 39 (D5), as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the changing speed of the effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C decreases. To do. When the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, as shown in FIG. 40B, the number “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is “ A “normal” reach effect that is stopped (temporarily stopped) together with the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed, but the variable display result is “out”. In such a case, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (H), after displaying an effect image indicating that the number indicating “5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9C having “medium”, “medium” is displayed. Reach out of the reach combination by stopping and displaying the effect symbols other than the number indicating “6” in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, such as stopping the effect symbol number “5” in the symbol display area 9C. It is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the, and end the variable display of the effect symbols. When reach production α1 to reach production α3, reach production β1, and reach production β2 are executed, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), the fluctuation of the production symbols in the “medium” symbol display area 9C that has been reduced. The speed increases again, and various reach effects are displayed. In the reach effect β1, after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 40D is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds. Further, in the case of any one of the reach effects α1 to the reach effects α3, after the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 40 (E) is displayed, the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 40 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, as shown in FIG. 40 (G), an effect symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 40G, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result becomes “out”. In such a case, it is only necessary to stop and display the effect symbols constituting the reach-rejected combination and end the variable display of the effect symbols. On the other hand, in reach production α2 and reach production α3, as shown in FIGS. 40 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage production display. Further, in the reach effect β2, after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 40 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display proceeds as shown in FIG. 40 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the second stage effect display is stopped (temporary stop display). The directed design appears. When the variable display result is “out of”, the displayed effect symbols are not changed, the effect symbols constituting the reach-out combination are stopped and displayed, and the effect symbol variable display is ended. In the reach effect α3, for example, the process proceeds to a third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, an effect symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage effect display appears. Thereafter, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the third stage effect display in the reach effect α3 is not shown in FIGS.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the effect control process of S704 to S709.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (S708). Furthermore, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number used for determining a production mode or the like is executed (S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control processing and the second ornament symbol display control processing are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  43 and 44 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (S612). Note that when read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command reception buffer, for example, a command reception buffer in a ring buffer format capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 24) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specifying command (S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result specifying command (any one of the display result 1 specifying command to the display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result specifying command storage area is stored (S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag (S624). ). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (S625), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag (S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S630).

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (S631), the production control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the production display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. (S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Control is performed (S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (S642). ). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (S643), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command reception flag (S644).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (S646). If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (S647), the production control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (S648).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (S649). Then, the process proceeds to S611.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 45, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is lit as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 45A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 45B).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 46, in this embodiment, the microcomputer 100 for effect control includes random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, random numbers for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding. SR3, random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of first pseudo change, random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of second pseudo change, random number SR5-1 for determining the notice type, and determining the notice effect Random number SR5-2, random number SR5-3 for first step-up notice determination, random number SR5-4 for movable object notice determination, random number SR5-5 for frame notice decision, random number SR5-6 for mini character notice decision, A random number SR5-7 for determining the effect blade accessory notice, a random number SR5-8 for determining the other system liquid crystal notice, and a random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect (slip) pattern are used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the effect.

  The random number SR4-1 of the temporary change symbol at the time of the first quasi-continuous change is an effect symbol (temporary stop display) in the “left”, “middle” and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R after the first change. The random number SR4-2 of the pseudo-continuous second variation temporary stop symbol is “left”, “middle”, “right” after the subsequent re-variation to be executed. ”Is a random number used to determine a production symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R.

  The random number SR3 for determining the sliding temporary stop symbol is used for temporarily or partially in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the specific effect of “sliding” is executed. It is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed.

  The random number SR5-1 for determining the notice type is a random number used for determining whether the type of the notice effect is the second step-up notice effect or the button notice effect. The random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect is a random number used for determining the notice effect according to the type of the notice effect determined using the random number SR-1. For example, when the second step-up notice effect is determined as the type of the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses the random number SR5-2 to determine the content of the second step-up notice effect (presence / effect state). . When the button notice effect is determined as the type of the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 uses the random number SR5-2 to indicate the content of the button notice effect (presence / email notice effect or card notice effect / effect mode). decide.

  Random number SR5-3 for determining the first step-up notice is a random number used to determine the content (presence / absence / effect form) of the first step-up notice effect. The random number SR5-4 for determining the moving object notice is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the moving object notice effect. The frame notice determination random number SR5-5 is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the frame notice effect. The random number SR5-6 for determining the mini character notice is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the mini character notice effect. The random number SR5-7 for determining the effect blade role advance notice is a random number used to determine the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the effect blade role advance notice effect. The random number SR5-8 for other system notice determination is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the other system notice effect. The contents of each notice effect will be described later.

  The random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern corresponding to the content of the effect operation when executing the specific effect of “slip” as one of a plurality of types. Random number.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 47A to 47D as a table for determining a predetermined non-reach combination. 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 47A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the symbol number “” of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 47B is a right final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 47C is a medium final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. This is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 48, and includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a right final stop symbol FZ1-. From the combination with 2, determination is made as to which of the left and right output types DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, and LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. And a data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 47 (B), the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. No numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design combination can be prevented from being a reach combination or jackpot combination. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 47 (C), combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the part of the combination. For example, even in a combination other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7 or the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the final stop symbol is not assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 or a certain non-reach similar to the chance. It can be made not to be a combination of.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (B), a table for determining a definite production symbol that is a combination of reach deviation. Final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are included. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 50 (A) is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that is a final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the final effect symbols that are combinations of reach deviation. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, are determined based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the same rendering symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2). The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 50 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the fixed effect symbols that are out of reach combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol. However, in FIG. 50B, as the data that can specify the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3, the symbol difference between the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is shown.

  In other words, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that constitutes the non-reach combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value from the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of the effect symbols, the effect symbols start to change in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the finalized effect symbol that is the variable display result of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in this order, the “left” and “right” symbol displays other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the "middle" symbol display is performed using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. A difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the determined symbol difference, a definite effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-3, Super PB3-1 to PB3-3, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- 4 is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to any of the fluctuation patterns of the super PA 3-6, and the symbol difference “− Data (determination values) corresponding to “2”, “−1”, “+1”, “+2” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 51 are provided as tables for determining a definite effect symbol that is one of the jackpot combinations. include. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 51 are the left symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the determined effect symbols that become the big hit symbols. It is a table referred to in order to determine the middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. Data corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as -3 (determination value) including. The final stop symbol determination table 163B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. -3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the same normal symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is used when it is determined to be a probable variation big hit, and the final stop symbol determination table 163B is used when it is determined to be a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit). used.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes a specific effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52, for example, as a table for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. 164A is included. When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 52 slides the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of the slips TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Special PG1-2, Special PG2-2, Special It is compared with the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as the change pattern of PG3-3. It is a numerical value (determination value) and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-varied to a low speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at a low speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-4, depending on the previous effect value (previous effect storage data: a value indicating the variation pattern of the previous effect symbol), the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. You may make it change distribution of. As an example, the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 that can be selected are changed according to which of the previous production values is 1 to 4. Each of 1-4 indicates each of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. The effect control CPU 101 sets the previous effect value in the storage area in the RAM when the slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is determined. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4). When the effect control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, the “slip” specific effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. In this case, it is possible to prevent the specific effect pattern from being the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  Also, instead of changing the configuration of the specific effect pattern determination table 164A, the specific effect pattern that is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time is not controlled by the control of the effect control CPU 101. You may make it do. In that case, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A illustrated in FIG. 52 is used, and the determined slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is specified by the previous determination value. If they match, the effect mode is replaced (for example, if the determined slip effect mode is slip TP1-n, it is replaced with slip TP1- (n + 1)).

  Further, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 53 is used as a table for determining an effect symbol to be temporarily displayed when the “slip” specific effect is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D shown in (A) to (D) are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used depending on whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the table selection rule as shown in FIG. 53 (E), for example. Selected as a table. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used to determine a temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped symbols. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. According to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping, and the effect symbol of the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol which becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C shown in (A) to (C) are included. Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C indicates that the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PA4- 3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, or execution until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of all re-variable display operations. For example, the remaining number of re-variable display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped one time before that. The final stop is such that the displayed design symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “1”, and the temporary stop symbol variation is displayed twice before (“pseudo-continuous variation”) is “2”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed before the pseudo continuous variation in which the determined effect symbol that is the symbol is stopped and displayed is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all revariable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3 If the remaining number of re-variation display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “1”, the symbol “left” is displayed. In the display area 9L, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and the “middle” symbol. In the display area 9C, it is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be displayed for temporary stop.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations to be executed before the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” in response to being any of -3, “Left” Left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 9L, right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" symbol display area 9R, and "middle". In the symbol display area 9C, the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed is selected as a use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 54A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 54B are the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol, It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by combinations of stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 54C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. Is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, each time according to the number of times of re-variation (including initial variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect. The variation of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R can be determined as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. .

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 56, the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from the start of the variation of the effect symbols until the finalized symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as a variable display operation, an effect display operation in a reach effect, and an effect display operation in a specific effect are stored as symbol variation control patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, various types according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. The control data for controlling the rendering operation is included, and the contents of various rendering controls, the switching timing of the rendering control, and the like are set in time series.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 57, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. . Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect operation in a big hit game state or a small hit game state such as an effect control process timer set value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, an end code The contents of various production controls according to the progress of the production, switching timing of production control, and the like are set in time series.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the effect symbol (and the decorative symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display process (S804): After the end of the variation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of big hit or small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): Display control during round is performed. In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a so-called probability variation promotion effect, a probability variation promotion effect is executed when a flag indicating that the probability variation promotion effect is being executed, which indicates execution of the probability variation promotion effect, is set. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S807).

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  Big hit end process (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception wait process (S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801) (S813).

  60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be off (S501). Whether it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command (S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbol that does not reach (S504). In the process of S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 47A is selected as the use table. Next, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 47B is selected as a use table. Subsequently, the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. Further, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 shown in FIG. 48 based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the left / right output type DC1-1 is Determine which of the multiple types. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 47C is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In the process of S504, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined, thereby producing the effect symbols. Don't make the stop symbol of a combination of reach or jackpot. Further, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7 or a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in the process of S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (S505). In the process of S505, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 50A is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the same effect design to be the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 50 (B) is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-3, the effect symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 are obtained. The design difference from the production design is determined. The effect control CPU 101 determines an effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 according to the determined symbol difference.

  As described above, in the processing of S505, the effect control CPU 101 first uses the final stop symbol determination table 162A, and finally “left” other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. And the effect symbols to be the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are determined. Next, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol which becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1. , The design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If it is not determined to be out of place (S501), the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not sudden probability change big hit or small hit has been decided (S507). Whether or not the sudden change big hit or small hit has been determined is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command (see FIG. 24) is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. The If it is suddenly determined to be a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is one of the special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 fluctuation patterns (S508). ). As shown in FIG. 9, the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 are all variation patterns in which the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. If it is determined in the process of S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3, the process proceeds to S504, and the effect control CPU 101 becomes the final stop symbol in the process of S504. Determine the design.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S505.

  If the sudden change probability big hit and the small hit are not determined (S507), the final stop symbol of the effect combination of the big hit combination is determined (S511). In the process of S511, the effect control CPU 101 selects the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 51A as the use table when it is determined to make a probable big hit. When it is determined to make a big hit, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 51B is selected as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR1-1, the combination of the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, which becomes a big hit symbol, is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A. Determine as a stop symbol. In addition, when it is decided to make a probable big hit, a stop symbol that generally reminds of a non-probable big hit such as “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” as the left middle right definite effect symbols. May be derived and displayed (refer to FIG. 51A), but in the final stop symbol determination table 163A, determination values should not be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”. Then, when it is determined to be a probable big hit, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” may not be selected. Also, when it is decided to win a probable big hit, when “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” can be selected as the final left / right determined effect symbols, etc. In addition, by executing a so-called probability change promotion effect, the left middle right determined effect symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 may be changed to “7” or the like. It should be noted that in a gaming machine that does not report on the probability variation state, the probability variation promotion effect is not executed, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the game state (whether it is the probability variation state) from the confirmed effect symbol. May be.

  After executing any one of S504, S505, and S511, or after becoming “N” in S508, the effect control CPU 101 executes a specific effect setting process (S516).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not include the specific effect (“slip” or “pseudo-continuous”) (S551). . If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect, the specific effect setting process ends.

  If the variation pattern includes the specific effect, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “slip” (S552). If it is the specific effect of “slip”, the effect control CPU 101 selects the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as the use table (S553). If the specific effect of “slip” is selected, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 52 is selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (S554). That is, first, the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is determined to be one of the slips TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A selected in the process of S553. .

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 updates the previous effect value in the predetermined area of the RAM in accordance with the specific effect pattern determined in the process of S554 (S555). For example, when the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 is determined in the process of S554, the previous effect value is updated to 1. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 2. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 3. When the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4 is determined, the previous effect value is updated to 4.

  By executing the process of S555, it is determined every time when it is determined as one of the specific effect patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “slip”. The previous effect value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 is updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “slip” is determined as one of a plurality of types, data indicating the determined type of effect operation is stored.

  When the specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4), When the control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, in the process of S554, the “slip” specific effect is determined according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. Is executed, it is possible to prevent the specific effect pattern from being the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  If it is determined in the process of S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip” (ie, “pseudo-ream”), the process of S556 indicates the type of the pseudo-ream effect indicated by the received variation pattern command. Data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the temporary stop symbol according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. 53E based on the specific effect pattern determined in the process of S554 when it is the specific effect of “slip”. One of the tables 166A to 166D is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is extracted. The right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, and the right temporary stop symbol are referred to by referring to any of the selected temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3. The effect design which becomes either 1-3 and the left temporary stop design KZ1-4 is determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 sets the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation specified by the received variation pattern command to a constant M in the case of the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. For example, when the number of re-variations (not including initial variation) in the quasi-continuation is one specific effect pattern, the constant M is set to “1” and the number of re-variations (including initial variation) in the quasi-continuation. If there is no specific effect pattern twice, the constant M is set to “2”. In addition, “0” is set to the variable N indicating the determined number of combinations of temporary stop symbols. If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 54A is selected as the use table, and the fluctuation patterns are super PA3-3 and super PA3-6. , Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, the temporary stop shown in FIG. 54 (B) The symbol determination table 167B is selected as a use table. Further, the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the first pseudo change is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-1, by referring to either the selected temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. A combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the variable N, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of S556 is terminated. If the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 54C as the use table. Further, the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the pseudo-second variation is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the value of the extracted random number SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3- 2. Determine the combination of KZ3-3. Then, it is updated by adding 1 to the variable N, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M. Then, the process ends.

  After executing the specific effect setting process of S516, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of types (S517). The effect control CPU 101 selects a plurality of types of patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 56 in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the specific effect pattern determined in S516. One of the symbol variation control patterns is selected as a usage pattern.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for determining and setting the contents of the notice effect (S518A). The details of the notice effect setting process will be described later (see FIGS. 65 and 66).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern and the content of the notice effect (S518B). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S519).

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 in accordance with the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. Further, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled. Further, the movable member 78 and the effect blades 79a and 79b are controlled in a manner set in the movable member control data.

  The process table shown in FIG. 63 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each effect control pattern and notice effect. The process table corresponds to more specifically the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 56 and the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. When it is determined to execute the notice effect in the process of S518A, the process table in which data corresponding to the notice effect is set is selected and it is not determined to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect executed according to the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time according to the timer value set as the process timer set value has elapsed, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as the LED, the speaker 27, the movable member 78, and By repeating the process of controlling the effect blades 79a and 79b, an effect in the change of the effect symbol is realized. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to a production component that is not controlled during the variation period.

  When the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of S519, the effect device (the effect symbol is variable) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as an effect part to be displayed, various lamps as an effect part, the speaker 27 as an effect part, and a movable member 78 as an effect part and effect blades 79a and 79b) are started. (S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 is output in accordance with the movable member control data. Moreover, according to the movable member control data, a drive signal for operating the effect blades 79a and 79b is output.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (S522). ).

  65 and 66 are flowcharts showing the notice effect setting processing in S518A. In the notice effect setting processing, the effect control CPU 101 uses the notice type determination table shown in FIG. 67 as the second step-up notice effect based on the notice type determination random number SR5-1. Or a button notice effect (specifically, an e-mail notice effect and a card notice effect described later) is determined (S570). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the second step-up notice effect is determined as the type of the notice effect with a probability of 60%, and the button notice effect is determined as the type of the notice effect with a probability of 40%.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the second step-up notice effect and the button notice effect are both notice effects performed at the top of the screen. Therefore, in S570, it is determined whether the type of the notice effect is the second step-up notice effect or the button notice effect. In this way, in particular, when there is a notice effect that has the same screen position (or uses the same accessory) for executing the notice, it is configured to determine which of them is executed as the notice type. It is possible to prevent the execution positions (or objects) on the notice effect screen from overlapping.

  In this embodiment, first, after determining whether the type of the notice effect is the second step-up notice effect or the button notice effect in S570, S573, S576, S579, and S581, which will be described later, are shown in FIG. The mode of the second step-up notice effect is determined using the second notice setting table and the presence / absence of execution itself is determined, or the button notice effect form is determined using the button notice setting table shown in FIG. A case will be described in which determination is made as well as whether or not execution is performed. In the notice type determination table shown in FIG. 67, in addition to the second step-up notice effect and the button notice effect, a determination value is assigned even without the notice effect, and the type of the notice effect is set to the second step in S570. It may be determined whether to make an up-notice effect or a button-notice effect, and also determine whether or not to execute the notice effect. Then, in the second notice setting table shown in FIG. 69 and the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 71, a determination value is not assigned without a notice effect, and in S573, S576, S579, S581, and S583 to be described later, a second step up is performed. Only the mode of the notice effect or the mode of the button notice effect may be determined. With such a configuration, the appearance rate of the notice effect can be adjusted only by changing the setting of the notice type determination table, so the adjustment of the appearance rate of the notice effect can be simplified.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) has been received as a fluctuation pattern command (S571). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received is determined by, for example, data stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area. If it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach deviation variation pattern has been received (Y in S571), the first step-up advance notice is made using the first reach setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. The contents of the effect (presence / absence, effect mode) are determined (S572).

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect is a notice effect (preliminary notice from the first stage to a plurality of stages) at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one change of symbol (variable display). This refers to a notice effect that informs the player in stages that there is a possibility of a big hit by changing (developing) one or more times. In this embodiment, the player is notified that the probability of a big hit is higher as the number of times of changing the notice effect increases (the more the notice effect is executed in multiple stages). Note that the step-up notice effect may end without the first notice effect changing.

  Note that the step-up notice effect may be such that the shape and color of one character changes, and the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as seen from the player changes step by step. If it can be recognized as “step-up notice”, it can be said.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 82, etc.), the content of the first step-up notice effect is that characters (human characters) appear in stages at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is directed to go. Detailed contents of the first step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the first non-reach off notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 68, the notice effect “none”, the effect form (only the development pattern “A”) executed only for the notice effect A, and the notice effect A are executed. An effect mode (the development pattern of “A → B”) in which the notice effect B is executed after that, and an effect mode in which the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed ( “A → B → C” development pattern) and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are executed in order (“A → B → C → D”). Development pattern), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice pattern B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are executed in order (an extension pattern “A → B → C → D → E”). ), After the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, WARNING effect D, the effect is produced that announcement attraction e are executed in the order (development patterns of "A → B → C → D → e"), it is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. The numbers shown in “Allocation” indicate the number of determination values assigned to each effect mode. The same applies to the other tables (FIGS. 69 to 72).

  In the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 68, “A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, No determination value is assigned to “A → B → C → D → e” (the number of determination values is 0). This is to prevent the occurrence of the advance notice effect C or higher when the reach does not occur, that is, to determine the occurrence of reach when the effect of the advance notice effect C or higher appears.

  In S572, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-3 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in S570 is the second step-up notice effect (S572A). If the type of the notice effect is the second step-up notice effect, the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect are shown using the second reach setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. Determine (S573).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 83, FIG. 85, etc.), the content of the second step-up notice effect changes stepwise (development, conversion) on the background image of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is a production that will let you. Detailed contents of the second step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the second notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 69, the notice effect “None”, the effect mode in which only the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “X”), and the notice effect X are executed. An effect mode (the development pattern of “X → Y”) in which the notice effect Y is executed after that, and an effect mode in which the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed ( “X → Y → Z”), and after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is executed, and then the notice effect z is executed (the development pattern “X → Y → z”). ) And are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S573, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, based on the notice effect (“None”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined. To do.

  In S571, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach deviation variation pattern is not received (N in S571), whether or not the presentation control CPU 101 has received a command corresponding to the normal reach deviation variation pattern. (S574). When it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation is received (Y in S574), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for the normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) of the one-step-up notice production are determined (S575).

  In the first notice setting table for losing the normal reach shown in the upper right of FIG. 68, the notice effect “none”, the effect form in which only the notice effect A is executed (the development pattern of “A”), and the notice effect A are executed. The effect mode in which the notice effect B is executed (the development pattern of “A → B”) and the effect state in which the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed (“ A development pattern of “A → B → C → D”), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are executed in order (the development of “A → B → C → D”). Pattern) and an effect mode in which the notice effect B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are sequentially executed after the notice effect A is executed (the development pattern of “A → B → C → D → E”). After the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B and the notice performance C, notice effect D, notice effect e are executed in order (the development pattern of “A → B → C → D → e”), and notice effect B is executed after notice effect A is executed. The notice mode C is temporarily terminated without being executed, and then the notice effect D is executed (the development pattern of “A → B → temporarily end → D”) and the notice effect after the notice effect A is executed. Although the effect B is executed, the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect E are executed in order (“A → B → temporarily end → D → E”). Development pattern) and the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect E are executed in order. (Development pattern of “A → B → End → D → E”) After that, the notice effect B is executed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect e are sequentially executed (“A → B → end once → D”). → e ”development pattern) is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In the first advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 68, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A → B → C → D → e ”,“ A → B → Temporary End → D ”,“ A → B → Temporary End → D → E ”, and“ A → B → Temporary End → D → e ”are not assigned. The number of values is 0). This is for the purpose of determining the occurrence of super reach when an effect greater than the notice effect D appears.

  In S575, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-3 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in S570 is the second step-up notice effect (S575A). If the type of the notice effect is the second step-up notice effect, the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect are determined using the second reach setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. (S576).

  In the second advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 69, the notice effect “None”, the effect mode in which only the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “X”), and the notice effect X are executed. From which the notice effect Y is executed (the development pattern “X → Y”), and the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (“ X → Y → Z ”), and after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is executed, and then the notice effect z is executed (the development pattern“ X → Y → z ”). And after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (the development pattern “X → temporarily end → Z”) is set. Has been. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In S576, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, based on the notice effect (“None”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined. To do.

  In S574, when it is determined that the CPU 101 for effect control has not received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the normal reach (N in S574), whether or not the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the super reach has been received. (S577). When it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation is received (Y in S577), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for super reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) of the first step-up notice production are determined (S578).

  In the first advance notice setting table for super-reaching deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 68, the production mode having the same contents as the first advance notice setting table for deviation of normal reach shown in the upper right of FIG. 68 is set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In S578, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-3 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in S570 is the second step-up notice effect (S578A). If the type of the notice effect is the second step-up notice effect, the contents of the second step-up notice effect (presence / absence, effect mode) are displayed using the second notice setting table for super-reaching shown in the lower left of FIG. Determine (S579).

  In the second advance notice setting table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 69, the production mode having the same contents as the second advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 69 is set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In step S579, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, based on the notice effect (“None”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined. To do.

  In S577, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of super-reach is not received (N in S577), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern has been received. 68, the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect are determined using the first jackpot first notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. 68 (S580).

  In the first notice setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 68, the production mode having the same contents as those of the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation and super reach deviation shown in the upper right and lower left of FIG. A predetermined number of judgment values are assigned to each production mode.

  In S580, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the first step-up notice determination random number SR5-3, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in S570 is the second step-up notice effect (S580A). If the type of the notice effect is the second step up notice effect, the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the second step up notice effect are determined using the second notice setting table for jackpot shown in the lower right of FIG. (S581).

  In the second notice setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 69, the same aspect as the second notice setting table for losing normal reach and super reach shown in the upper right and lower left of FIG. 69 is set. A predetermined number of judgment values are assigned to each production mode.

  In S581, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, based on the notice effect (“None”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined. To do.

  In this embodiment, the presence / absence of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the effect mode are determined in the same notice setting table (first notice setting table, The second notice setting table) is used. However, the same notice setting table is not used for all types of jackpots, but a notice setting table is used for each of the big hits, probable big hits, sudden probable big hits, and small hits. The presence / absence of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the effect mode may be determined. In this case, by changing the distribution of the judgment value for the notice effect in each notice setting table, the execution rate of the step-up notice and the appearance ratio of the effect mode can be made different according to the type of the big hit. For example, the probability variation big hit is compared to the normal big hit, and a table is set so that a pattern that continues to be stepped up, such as a production mode of “A → B → C → D → e” and a production mode of “Temporary → Resume”, can be selected. By setting, the interest can be further improved. In addition, by setting the table so that “Simply End → Resurrection” is selected for Sudden Probability Big Hit and Small Hit, for example, “Some Time End → Resurrection” is not selected for Small Hit, Even if the game is in a similar or identical manner and the game state is suddenly indistinguishable between the probable big hit and the small win (the game state in which the probable state is indistinguishable), the notice effect is produced. In this aspect, it is possible to determine whether a sudden big hit or a small win has occurred suddenly, so that the gameability can be improved.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the movable object notice effect using the movable object notice setting table shown in FIG. 70 (S582). Specifically, based on the content of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command or the content of the display result based on the display result designation command (big hit judgment result), it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table, and the content of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table for the big hit in the case of a big hit. .

  In this embodiment, the movable object notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit when the movable member 78 operates in a scheduled manner. That is, the movable object notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that the movable member 78 changes (develops and operates) one or more times stepwise). Detailed contents of the movable object notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the movable object notice setting table shown in FIG. 70, the notice member “None”, the effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the first notice timing, and the second notice timing (timing different from the first notice timing) are movable members. An effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the third notice timing (both the first notice timing and the second notice timing) is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In S582, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-4 for determining the movable object notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the movable object notice setting table. Based on the notice effects (“none”, “first notice timing”, “second notice timing”, “third notice timing”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value, Presence / absence and production mode are determined.

  In addition, the content of the movable object notice effect is determined using the same big hit movable object notice setting table at the time of big hit, but depending on the type of big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit, sudden probable big hit, small hit) A plurality of movable object notice setting tables may be provided, and the contents of the movable object notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, by changing the distribution value of each table according to the type of jackpot, the execution ratio of the movable object notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode can be changed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the type of the notice effect determined in S570 is a button notice effect (S582A). If the type of the notice effect is the button notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines the content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the button notice effect using the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 71 (S583). Specifically, based on the content of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command or the content of the display result based on the display result designation command (big hit judgment result), it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit. The contents of the button notice effect are determined using the button notice setting table, and the contents of the button notice effect are determined using the button notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the button notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but the possibility of a big hit by displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player. It is an effect to notify that there is. That is, the button notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) one or more times stepwise in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120). Details of the button notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 71, the notice effect “None”, the effect form in which the first mail notice effect (the mail notice effect at the first stage of opening the mail) is executed at the early timing, and the first mail at the later time are shown. An effect mode in which a notice effect (e-mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a second e-mail notice effect (e-mail notification effect in two stages of opening an email) is executed at an early timing, and a second e-mail notice effect at a later time An effect mode in which (mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a card notice effect (notice effect in which a card appears) is executed at an early timing, and an effect mode in which a card notice effect is executed at a later timing Is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In S583, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the notice effect, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the button notice setting table. Then, the notice effect assigned to the determination value that matches the random value (“none”, “early timing in the first mail notice”, “late time in the first mail notice”, “early timing in the second mail notice”, The presence / absence of the button notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on “slow timing in the second mail notice”, “early timing in the card notice”, “late timing in the card notice”).

  In addition, the content of the button notice effect is determined by using the same big hit button notice setting table at the time of big hit. A button notice setting table may be provided, and the contents of the button notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, by changing the distribution value of each table according to the type of jackpot, the execution ratio of the button notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode can be changed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the frame (lamp) notice effect using the frame (lamp) notice setting table shown in FIG. 72 (S584). Specifically, based on the content of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command or the content of the display result based on the display result designation command (big hit judgment result), it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit. The contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table, and the contents of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by lighting the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern. That is, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) the lighting pattern one or more times stepwise). The specific contents of the frame notice effect will be omitted.

  The frame notice setting table shown in FIG. 72 is provided with a table at the time of losing and a table at the time of big hit. In each frame notice setting table, a notice effect “none” and a frame notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the frame advance notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In S584, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-5 for determining the frame advance notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the frame advance notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the frame notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the mini character notice effect using the mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 72 (S585). Specifically, based on the content of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command or the content of the display result based on the display result designation command (big hit judgment result), it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table, and the content of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the mini-character notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a mini-character (image of a character with a small size) is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit. Production. That is, the mini character notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) a mini character step by step one or more times).

  The mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 72 is provided with a table for a loss and a table for a big hit. In each mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the mini character notice notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-6 for determining the mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the mini character notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Note that a plurality of types of mini character notice effects are provided, and when mini character notice execution (mini character appearance) is decided, it may be determined which mini character appears. A character that can appear only at the time of a big hit may be set as the type of mini character. In addition to the jackpot notice, the mini character is a notice that suggests whether or not it will be a big hit with probability fluctuation at the time of the jackpot, a notice that suggests whether or not the fluctuation will reach, a notice that suggests whether to become super reach, Provided with multiple character mini-notices with different targets to be notified, such as a notice that suggests whether or not a pseudo-ream or a slide effect will occur, and is selected based on the determination result of jackpot determination and the contents of the fluctuation pattern in each system You may do it.

  In this embodiment, the allocation value in the table is changed for the case of loss and the case of big hit. However, the big change is also used for the probability variation big hit, normal big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, and small hit. There may be provided mini-character notice determination tables having different fraction values, and the appearance and type of mini-characters may be selected based on these tables. In this case, when a plurality of mini-characters are provided, a table may be provided for each system, and the appearance of each mini-character of the plurality of systems may be selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect using the effect blade accessory notice setting table shown in FIG. 72 (S586). Specifically, based on the content of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command or the content of the display result based on the display result designation command (big hit judgment result), it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) of the production blade role announcement effect are determined using the production blade role advance notice setting table, and in the case of a big hit, the production blade role announcement setting table for the big hit is used. Determine the content of the object notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect blade role notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the effect blade features 79a and 79b at a predetermined timing. That is to say, the effect blade role notice effect is not a notice effect that causes the effect blade role 79a, 79b to operate once or a plurality of times. The specific details of the effect feather notice announcement will be omitted.

  The effect blade accessory notice setting table shown in FIG. 72 is provided with a table at the time of losing and a table at the time of a big hit. In each effect blade accessory notice setting table, the notice effect “None” and the effect blade accessory notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the effect blade accompaniment notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-7 for determining the effect blade accessory notice, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the effect blade accessory notice setting table. . Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the other system liquid crystal notice setting table shown in FIG. 72 to determine whether or not there is another system liquid crystal notice effect (notice effect of another system different from other notices such as step-up notice and button notice). Determine (S587). Specifically, based on the content of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command or the content of the display result based on the display result designation command (big hit judgment result), it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit. The other system liquid crystal notice setting table is used to determine the content (presence / absence, production mode) of the other system liquid crystal notice setting. When the big hit, the other system liquid crystal notice setting table for the big hit is used. Determine the content.

  In this embodiment, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a predetermined image (an image of a character appearing in a step-up notice or an image displayed as a button notice, on the display screen of the effect display device 9). This is an effect of notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying an image different from the image of the mini character) at a predetermined timing. That is, the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not a notice effect that changes a predetermined image once or a plurality of times on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Specific contents of the other system liquid crystal notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The other system liquid crystal notice setting table shown in FIG. 72 is provided with a table at the time of losing and a table at the time of big hit. In each other system liquid crystal notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the other system liquid crystal notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. It should be noted that the determination value is set so that the probability of execution of the other system liquid crystal notice announcement effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In S587, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-7 for determining the other system liquid crystal notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the other system liquid crystal notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the separately determined first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect are possible (S588).

  Specifically, combinations shown in FIGS. 73 to 76 are conceivable as combinations of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. 73 to 76 are explanatory diagrams showing whether or not a combination of the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice is possible.

  In this embodiment, as the first step-up notice effect effect form (development pattern), an effect form in which the notice effect changes twice (development in two stages) (an effect aspect of “A → B → C” or more) is executed. When this is done, the presentation mode ("X-> Y-> Z" or "X-> Y-> z") in which the preview stage changes twice (development in two stages) as the stage mode (development pattern) of the second step-up notification stage. Is not executed. That is, an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more in the first step-up notice effect and an effect form “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” in the second step-up notice effect are executed simultaneously. Is prohibited. This is because, in this embodiment, when “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” is executed as the production mode of the second step-up notice effect, for example, (3-8) in FIG. As shown in (3-11) of FIG. 89, since the background image representing the second step-up notice effect is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, this is displayed. At this time, the notice effect “C” of the first step-up notice effect executed at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 cannot be executed (a character corresponding to the notice effect C may appear on the display screen). It is not possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 74, when an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more is determined as the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect, “X → The production mode of “Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” must not be determined.

  Therefore, the first aspect of the advance notice of the step-up notice is “A → B → C” or higher (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”). ”“ A → B → C → D → e ”), and when the effect modes“ X → Y → Z ”and“ X → Y → z ”are determined as the effect modes of the second step-up notice effect, As shown in FIG. 74, it is determined that the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (N in S588). And the process which changes (rewrites) the production | generation aspect of 2nd step-up notice effect to "X-> Y" which lowered step up by one step, for example is performed (S589). When the production mode of “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” is determined as the production mode of the second step-up notice effect, the production mode of the first step-up notice effect is, for example, step You may make it perform the process which changes (rewrites) to the production | generation aspect "A-> B" which lowered up one step or more.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid duplication of two step-up notice effects executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and notice by executing two notice effects simultaneously on the display screen. Display complexity can be avoided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as an effect mode of the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → temporary termination → D”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → E”, “A → B → temporary termination”. The production mode of “→ D → e” can be determined. In such an effect mode, after the notice effect B is executed, it is presumed that the step-up notice is once ended, and then the notice effect D is executed to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored. Here, after the step-up notice is presumed to end, the notice effect D is executed when the notice effect Z or z of the second step-up notice effect is executed, and the step-up notice is restored. It is effective to show it. By linking such a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation. Therefore, as the production mode of the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → temporary termination → D”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → E”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → e”. When the production mode is determined, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, in S588, the production mode of the second step-up notice production (“X → Y → Z”, “X → Y → z”) It is determined that the combination is possible, and it is determined that the combination with the production mode (“none”, “X only”, “X → Y”) of the second step-up notice effect is impossible. If it is determined that the combination is not possible (N in S588), the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is changed (rewritten) to, for example, “X → Y → Z” with one step up. The process is executed (S589). Even if it is determined that the combination is impossible, other notice effect (movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), button notice (late timing) or other system liquid crystal notice) If any of the above is confirmed and another notice effect is executed, the process of changing the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is not executed. After pretending that the step-up notice was once completed, another notice effect (movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), button notice (late timing) or other system liquid crystal notice) was executed. This is for the purpose of causing the notice effect D to be executed and to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” can be determined as the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect. In such an effect mode, after the notice effect X is executed, it is presumed that the step-up notice has once ended, and then the notice effect Z is executed to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored. Here, after the step-up notice is presumed to end, the notice effect D is executed when the notice effect B of the first step-up notice effect is executed, and the step-up notice is revived. Is effective. By linking such a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation. Therefore, when an effect mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” is determined as an effect mode of the second step-up notice effect, as shown in FIG. 76, an effect mode of the first step-up notice effect is shown in S588. It is determined that only the combination of “A → B” is possible, and that it is impossible to combine with other effects. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 76, when the production mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” is determined as the production mode of the second step-up notice effect, the production mode of the first step-up notice production is “ It is determined that a combination with an effect mode (such as “A → B → temporarily end → D”) that is once finished is also impossible. If it is determined that the combination is not possible (N in S588), a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect from “A → B” is executed (S589).

  In this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes twice (or more than two stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → When a production mode of “B → C” or more is executed, reach (normal reach, super reach) is always generated. Accordingly, in the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation in the upper left of FIG. 68, no determination value is assigned to the production mode of “A → B → C” or more. For this reason, when reach does not occur (when a non-reach deviation variation pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C” “A → B → C → D ”,“ A → B → C → D → E ”,“ A → B → C → D → e ”) are not always determined.

  In the first notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 68, the reach confirmation effect modes (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A” → B → C → D → e ”)), it is impossible to combine the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect in S588 (reaching confirmation effect mode). Cannot be executed). In this case, in S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B”) that is not reach determination is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect is changed three times or more (developed at least three stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → Super-reach always occurs when a production mode of “B → C → D” or more or “A → B → temporarily end → D” or more is executed. Accordingly, in the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation in the upper right of FIG. 68, determination values are assigned to the production modes of “A → B → C → D” and “A → B → Temporary End → D” or more. Not. For this reason, when super reach does not occur (when a normal reach deviation variation pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “ "A-> B-> C-> D-> E" "A-> B-> C-> D-> e" "A-> B-> End once-> D" "A-> B-> End once-> D-> E" "A-> B-> End once → D → e ”) is not always determined.

  In the first notice setting table shown in the upper right of FIG. 68, the super-reach determination effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A → B → C → D”). → e ”,“ A → B → temporary → D ”,“ A → B → temporary termination → D → E ”,“ A → B → temporary termination → D → e ”)). In S588, it is determined that the combination of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect is impossible (execution of the super reach determination effect mode is impossible). In this case, in S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B → C”) that is not super reach determination is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) can be combined with the other system liquid crystal notice effect, and the first step up. It is determined whether or not the combination of the notice effect and the button notice effect is possible (S590). In this embodiment, the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, the button notice effect, and the other system liquid crystal notice effect are all executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9, so the step up This is because the notice effect and other notice effects (button notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) may not be executed at the same time.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 to 76, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is an effect mode (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”) for executing the notice effect C for the first step-up notice effect. The combination of “A → B → C → D → E” and “A → B → C → D → e”) is impossible, and for the second step-up notice effect, the notice effect Z or z is executed. ("X-> Y-> Z", "X-> Y-> z", "X-> end once-> Z") is impossible. The timing at which the other-system liquid crystal notice effect (see FIGS. 95 (5-5) and (5-6)) in which the notice image is displayed on the full screen overlaps with the timing at which the notice effect C is executed, and the notice image is displayed. Since the timing at which the other-system liquid crystal notice effect for full screen display is executed and the timing at which the notice image Z or z for which the full-screen display is executed are overlapped, the other system liquid crystal notice effect and the notice effect C This is because the other system liquid crystal notice effect and the notice effect Z or z cannot be executed simultaneously. If it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in S590), for example, a change is made so that the effect mode of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not executed or the notice effect C and the notice effects Z and z are not executed ( A rewriting process is executed (S591).

  As for the button notice effect, the button notice effect (email notice effect, card notice effect) executed at an early timing can be combined with any effect mode in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. On the other hand, button notice effects (mail notice effects, card notice effects) executed at a later timing can be combined with any effect mode for the first step-up notice effect, but for the second step-up notice effect. A combination of “X → Y → Z” and “X → Y → z” is not possible. Since the timing at which the button notice effect is executed and the timing at which the notice effect Z or z at which the notice image is displayed on the full screen are overlapped, the button notice effect and the notice effect Z or z are executed simultaneously. It is because it is not possible. However, as shown in FIG. 67, only one of the second step-up notice effect and the button notice effect is executed, and both are not executed at the same time. It is determined that the step-up notice effect and the button notice effect can be combined), and the process of S591 is not performed.

  Moreover, since the movable object notice effect is executed by moving the movable member 78 around the effect display device 9, a step-up notice executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9 at any timing. It can be performed simultaneously with production. Therefore, the movable object notice effect can be combined with any effect form in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, after pretending that the step-up notice is once completed, any of the movable object notice, the button notice (slow-time mail notice or card notice), or another system liquid crystal notice is provided. It is effective to make it appear as if the notice effect D is executed and the step-up notice is revived in response to the execution of. Such a first step-up notice effect and other notice effects (movable object notice effect, button notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) can be linked effectively to give the player a sense of expectation.

  In such a case, as an effect form of the first step-up notice effect, an effect form in which the step-up notice is temporarily ended (that is, “A → B → temporary end → D”, “A → B → temporary end → D → E”). ”,“ A → B → End once → D → e ”), at least the second step-up notice effect Z, z, the movable object notice effect (second notice timing or The third notice timing), the button notice effect (late timing), or another system liquid crystal notice effect needs to be determined. In the process of S589 described above, an effect mode in which the step-up notice is once ended is determined as the first step-up notice effect, the notice effect Z, z of the second step-up notice effect, the movable object notice effect (second notice timing or When any of the third notice timing), the button notice effect (late timing), or the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not determined, the effect form of the second step-up notice effect is changed to, for example, “X → Y → Z”. However, it may be forcibly executed in any one of the movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), the button notice effect (late timing), or the other system liquid crystal notice effect.

  The presence / absence and the appearance mode of the notice effect determined as described above are stored (set) in a predetermined storage area (notice effect storage area) of the ROM in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, when the step-up notice effect once finished is restored, the notice effect D which is one notice effect of the step-up notice is executed. It is not always necessary to execute the notice effect D, and other different notice effects may be executed. That is, at the timing after the end of the step-up notice effect (the timing at which the step-up notice effect is recognized without being executed), other notice effects (button notice effect, movable object notice effect, other system) A liquid crystal notice effect) may be generated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the big hit to the discouraged player who recognizes that the step-up notice effect has once ended and recognizes that the possibility of the big hit is low. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to maintain a further expectation by generating a new notice effect afterwards. Note that it is not necessary to execute 100% of the new notice effect after the other notice effect is executed, and it may be executed at a predetermined rate. In that case, a new effect is executed by using a table in which the appearance rate at which a new notice effect appears is higher than when the big hit is determined to be out of place. Since the player can recognize that the possibility of a big hit is increased, the interest can be further improved.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (S842). When the process timer times out (S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (S844). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next (S845).

  Next, in step S845, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) is executed according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data or the like). Confirm (S846). When the step-up notice effect is being executed (Y of S846), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the switching timing of the step-up notice effect based on the contents of the process data (S847). If it is the switching timing of the step-up notice effect (Y in S847), the effect control CPU 101 performs the step according to the contents of the process data (particularly, display control execution data including the notice effect, lamp control execution data, and movable member control data). The up notice effect switching (change, development) is executed (S848).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 can be operated (button effective period) (S849). The operation button 120 is effective when the button notice effect is being executed. When the button is valid (Y in S849), the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of detecting whether or not the operation button 120 is turned on (pressed) (S850). The on state of the operation button 120 is detected by inputting an on signal from the operation button 120. When the effect control CPU 101 detects that the operation button 120 is turned on (Y in S850), the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect corresponding to the operation button 120 being turned on in the set button notice effect (email notice or card notice) (S851). .

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect based on the contents of the process data (movable member control data and the like) (S852). If it is the execution timing of the moving object notice effect (Y in S852), the movable member 78 is operated according to the contents of the process data (particularly, the movable member control data) to execute the movable object notice effect (S853).

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not it is the execution timing of other notice effects (frame notice effect, mini character notice effect, effect blade accessory notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) based on the contents of the process data. (S854). If it is the execution timing of the other notice effect (Y in S854), the other notice effect is executed according to the contents of the process data (S855). That is, the frame lamp 28 is turned on with a predetermined lighting pattern, a mini character image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at a predetermined timing, the effect blades 79a and 79b are operated, the effect display device 9 An image (an image of another system) different from an image used for other effects is displayed on the screen.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (S856), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) (S858). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S857), the process proceeds to S848. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern including the effect of “pseudo ream” (non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super When executing the processing of S841 to S845 based on PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3), as described above, the effect display is performed so that multiple variations of the effect symbol are executed. Display control of the device 9 is executed. In other words, the effect control data indicating the effect of the pseudo-continuous is also set in the process table corresponding to the pseudo-continuous variation pattern.

  Next, the execution timing (notification timing) of various notice effects will be described. FIG. 78 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of various notice effects. As shown in FIG. 78, the other system LCD notice, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the mail notice (a kind of button notice), the card notice (a kind of button notice) and the mini character notice are displayed on the effect display device 9. Since this is a notice using an image displayed on the screen, these notices are called liquid crystal notices.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, the first step-up notice is a notice of step-up in order of step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), step (E) (“A → B → C → D → E ”) or a step-up notice (“ A → B → C → D ”) from step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), step (e) in this order. → e ”). Here, step (A) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect A is being executed, step (B) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect B is being executed, and step (C) is the notice effect. Step (D) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect D is being executed, and step (E) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect E is being executed. Step (e) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect e is being executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, the second step-up notice is a notice that “step-up from step (X) to step (Y) and step-up from step (Y) to step (Z)” (“X → Y → Z "), or a notice (" X → Y → z ") that steps up from step (X) to step (Y) and steps up from step (Y) to step (z). Here, step (X) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect X is being executed, step (Y) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect Y is being executed, and step (Z) is the notice effect. The stage (period) in which Z is executed is shown, and step (z) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect z is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 78, among the plurality of notice effects, the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash) are the notice effects that can be executed simultaneously with the start of the change of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In addition, the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, the mail notice effect, the card notice effect, the mini character notice effect, the wing wing object notice effect, the movable object notice effect, and the frame notice effect have a variation in the effect design. It is a notice effect that can be executed from the time of shifting to high-speed fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are different in timing at which the notice effect changes (that is, switching timing or development timing). Specifically, when the first step-up notice effect is executed and the second step-up notice effect is executed, step (A) first changes to step (B), and then step (X). Changes to step (Y). When step (B) in the first step-up notice changes to step (C), step (Y) in the second step-up notice does not change to step (Z) or (z) (“A → B → C ”Is not developed until“ X → Y → Z or z ”as shown in FIG. 74: see S588 and S589). When the first step-up notice changes (develops) up to step (C), reach (normal reach, super reach) is determined.

  On the other hand, when step (B) in the first step-up notice does not change to step (C), step (Y) in the second step-up notice can change to step (Z) or (z). In this case, the step (Y) changes to the step (Z) or (z) after the player can recognize that the step (B) has not changed to the step (C). That is, step (Y) changes to step (Z) or (z) after the point in time when step (B) does not change to step (C) but recognizes that the step-up notice has ended.

  When the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are linked so that the first step-up notice will be restored after the first step-up notice is finished, the second step-up notice step (Z) or (z) is used. In response to the change, step (D) in the first step-up notice is executed. With such a configuration, the player's expectations can be met effectively.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the final step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (Z) or (z), the left symbol (first stop symbol that stops first) stops. Exit before. On the other hand, the step (C) in the first step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (C) is continued even after the left symbol is stopped, and the step (D), step (E) or (e), that is, the notice effect (D). Or the notice effect (E) or (e) can be executed even after the left symbol stops. According to such a configuration, after the left symbol is stopped, the step-up notice effect can be reduced (to one), and the player can be focused on the stop symbol (right symbol, middle symbol) of the effect symbol. it can.

  In the example shown in FIG. 78, after the left symbol (first stop symbol) stops, the step-up advancement from step (C) to step (D) is performed in the first step-up notice effect, and from step (D). Although the step (E) or (e) shows the case of step-up development, the step-up development may be performed even after reaching the reach mode. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 78, after the left symbol (first stop symbol) stops, and the right symbol (second stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the left symbol and reaches the reach mode, the first step In the up notice effect, it may be configured to step up from step (D) to step (E) or (e).

  In the example shown in FIG. 78, the e-mail notice notifies the player that the e-mail has been received, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and opens the e-mail according to the operation of the operation button 120 of the player. The contents of the mail are notified, and the possibility of big hit is recognized according to the contents of the mail. It should be noted that in the e-mail notice, “E-mail 2nd stage” is an effect of opening the e-mail in accordance with the second operation button 120 operation by the player and notifying the contents of the e-mail. In the case of “2 levels of mail”, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that of “1 level of mail”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 78, the card notice displays the card, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and releases the card in response to the operation of the player's operation button 120 (that is, flips over). The content written on the card is notified, and the possibility of a big hit is recognized according to the content.

  As shown in FIG. 78, button notice effects such as e-mail notices and card notices are executed over a plurality of steps of step-up notice effects. In the example shown in FIG. 78, the button notice effect is executed across step (A), step (B), and step (C) of the first step-up notice effect.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 78, the mini character notice indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing the mini character to appear on the screen of the effect display device 9 (for example, skipping the butterfly) at the start of the change of the effect symbol. To recognize.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 78, the effect feather accompaniment notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the effect feather actors 79a and 79b when the effect design fluctuates at high speed. Let

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 78, the movable object notification is performed by operating the movable member 78 at the time point (first notification timing) when the change in the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation or in step (B) in the first step-up notification. After the execution, the movable member 78 is operated at the time (second notice timing) before step (D) is executed, or any of the first notice timing and the second notice timing (third notice timing) However, by operating the movable member 78, the player is made aware that there is a possibility of a big hit. In this embodiment, when the movable member 78 is operated at the second notice timing than the first notice timing and at the third notice timing than the second notice timing, the possibility of a big hit is increased. Here, after it appears that the first step-up notice has ended in step (B), the movable member 78 is operated at the second timing to execute the movable object notice, and then the step (D in the first step-up notice) ) Can be made to appear as if the first step-up notice has been restored.

  In the example shown in FIG. 78, the frame advance notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by turning on the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern at the start of the change of the effect symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 78, the other-system liquid crystal notice is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at a time point after the execution of step (B) in the first step-up notice and before the execution of step (D). By displaying a predetermined image (an image different from an image displayed in another liquid crystal notice), the player is made aware that there is a possibility of a big hit. In this case, after the first step-up notice is presumed to have ended in step (B), the other-system liquid crystal notice is executed, and then step (D) in the first step-up notice is executed, thereby causing the first step. It will be possible to appear as if the advance notice has been revived.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern (notice pattern) that develops from step (Y) to step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice effect. As shown in FIG. 79, in the second step-up notice, step (X) is executed, and when step (Y) is executed, a suggestive effect that suggests the end of the second step-up notice is executed. In addition, since the suggestion effect has a function of leaving a reverberation of the effect of the executed step (Y), the suggestion effect is also referred to as a reverberation display. In addition, the suggestion effect in this embodiment is an effect such that, as shown in FIG. 83 (2-4), the beetle insects that are stopping on the tree are hidden in the tree (in the leaves).

  Here, in the second step-up notice, when the step (Y) changes to the step (Z), the step changes to the step (Z) as soon as the step (Y) ends, and the suggestive effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the second step-up notice, when the step (Y) changes to the step (z), the step changes to the step (z) after the lapse of a predetermined period from the end of the step (Y), and the suggested effect is the predetermined period. Executed.

  As described above, in the second step-up notice, when the process changes to step (Y), the suggestion effect is executed after the end of step (Y) and then the second step-up notice is finished, and step (Y) There are a pattern in which the step (Z) is executed without executing the suggestion effect after the end, and a pattern in which the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined period after the end of the step (Y) and then the step (z) is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest about whether or not the next notice effect (step) continues after execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (S870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to S877. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in S876. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in S871 to S876 is executed. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to S877.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not (S871). When the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out-of-line symbol, small hit symbol or big hit symbol) (S872).

  In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the production symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on this, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  When the small winning symbol or the big winning symbol is not displayed in the process of S872 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N of S873), the effect control CPU 101 changes the value of the effect control process flag to the variation pattern. The value is updated according to the command reception waiting process (S800) (S874).

  When the small winning symbol or the big winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of S872 (Y in S873), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (S876) to indicate that the big hit starting designation command has been received. Big hit start designation command reception flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command has been received It is confirmed whether or not is set (S877). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (S878), and a process corresponding to the fanfare effect. A table is selected (S879).

If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag. Also, in the process of S879, the effect control CPU 101 is determined to be a normal big hit or a probable big hit (specifically, when receiving a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command: FIG. 24) . reference), select the process table corresponding to "15th open game start notification" shown in FIG. 57, in the case (specifically, which is determined in Ri Koatari or sudden probability variation Daito, display result When the 4 designation command or the display result 5 designation command is received (see FIG. 24), the process table corresponding to the “twice open game start notification (suddenly probable big hit / small hit common)” shown in FIG. Select. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (S880), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data) 1) In accordance with the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, movable member 78 as production component and production blade accessory 79a, 79b) The control is executed (S881). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) (S882).

  Next, specific examples of various notice effects will be described.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of each notice effect in the first step-up notice and the contents of each notice effect in the second step-up notice. The first step notice (step-up notice on the right side) includes five notice effects (notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D, and notice effect E). In FIG. 81, illustration of the notice effect e is omitted. As shown in FIG. 81, as the notice effect A, an effect is performed in which a human character A appears from the right side of the screen in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen. As the notice effect B, an effect in which a human character B appears from the right side of the screen in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect C, an effect in which a human character C appears from the right side of the screen in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect D, the characters A, B, and C appear simultaneously from the left side of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and stop at the center of the screen. As the notice effect E, an effect in which a large human character D appears from the right side of the screen where the characters A, B, and C are gathered in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  The second step notice (left step-up notice) includes three notice effects (notice effect X, notice effect Y, and notice effect Z). In FIG. 81, illustration of the notice effect z is omitted. As shown in FIG. 81, as the notice effect X, an effect in which a beetle character flies from the right side of the screen in the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Y, an effect in which the beetle character stays on the tree in the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Z, an effect that the tree expands and the beetle character expands as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  Next, a specific example of the first step-up notice will be described. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first step-up notice. The first step-up notice can execute up to five notice effects as described above. As shown in FIG. 82, a background image of the tree 200 is displayed on the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the start condition is satisfied from the state in which the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 82 (1-1)), the variation of all the production symbols is started. (1-2) When the effect design changes to a high speed change and the start timing of the first step-up notice comes, the notice effect A (step ( A)), the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen (1-2) and goes to the left side of the screen. Thereafter, when the change timing of a predetermined step comes, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen (1-3) as the notice effect B (step (B)) in the first step-up notice, and goes to the left side of the screen. Note that, for example, in S572, S575, S578, and S580 of FIG. 65, when it is determined that the first step-up notice only causes the notice effect A to appear, the notice effect even if the timing when the notice effect B appears appears. B will not appear. At the subsequent predetermined step change timing, the character C212 appears from the right side of the screen (1-4) as the notice effect C (step (C)) in the first step-up notice, and goes to the left side of the screen. Since the character C212 is set so as not to appear in the case of non-reach (see FIG. 68), it is determined that the reach will occur at this point. Further, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 simultaneously appear from the left of the screen as the notice effect D (step (D)) in the first step-up notice (1-5). , It stops in the center of the screen. Characters A, B, and C are set so that they do not appear when they are out of normal reach (notice effect D is not executed) (see FIG. 68). Is fixed. Thereafter, after the right symbol (“7”) stops and reach occurs, a large human character D213 appears from the left side of the screen as the notice effect E (step (E)) in the first step-up notice (1-6). ), The characters are gathered in the center, and the display of the characters gathered in the center disappears in order to execute a predetermined reach state effect thereafter.

  Next, a specific example of the second step-up notice will be described. 83 to 85 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the second step-up notice. As described above, the second step-up notice can execute up to three notice effects. As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, when the start condition is satisfied in the left middle right symbol display areas 9 </ b> L, 9 </ b> C, 9 </ b> R from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 83 (2-1)). When all the effect symbols start to change (2-2), the effect symbol changes to a high-speed change, and when the second step-up notice starts, in the background of the effect display device 9, the second step-up notice As the notice effect X (step (X)), the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen (2-2). Thereafter, when a predetermined step change timing is reached, a notice effect Y (step (Y)) in the second step-up notice is displayed that the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 (2-3). When the second step-up notice ends with the notice effect X, an effect is performed in which the beetle character 220 flying from the right is hidden in the shade (leaves) of the tree without being confined to the tree. Thereafter, in the case of changing to the notice effect Z (step (Z)) in the second step-up notice at a predetermined step change timing, the process proceeds to FIG. 85 (2-7). On the other hand, when there is no change to the notice effect Z (step (Z)), the beetle character 220 perching on the tree 200 is hidden in the shade (leaves) of the tree as a suggestive effect (remnant display) (2-4). ) And then disappears completely (2-5). The enlarged contents of (2-3) and (2-4) are shown in FIG. Thereafter, in the case of changing to a notice effect z (step (z)) in the second step-up notice at a predetermined step change timing, the process proceeds to FIG. 85 (2-6). When the second step-up notice ends with the notice effect X → Y, it disappears completely (2-5). After the effect is performed, the notice effect z is not performed even if the step change timing elapses. . Therefore, when an effect that completely disappears is performed, the second step-up notice may end as it is.

  In FIG. 85 (2-7), as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, the tree 200 expands and the beetle character 220 expands. This notice effect is the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice. Thereafter, the shift symbol (“741”) is stopped and displayed without the occurrence of reach (2-8), or the reach is generated and the reach effect is executed (2-9). In FIG. 85 (2-6), as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, the tree 200 expands, the beetle character 220 expands, and the beetle character 220 moves around. This notice effect is the notice effect z in the second step-up notice. Thereafter, the shift symbol (“741”) is stopped and displayed without the occurrence of reach (2-8), or the reach is generated and the reach effect is executed (2-9).

  Next, a specific example in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are executed simultaneously in the same period during variable display will be described. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in a specific example in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display. In the example shown in FIG. 86, notice effect A → B → temporary end → D → E is executed as the first step-up notice, and notice effect X → Y → Z or z is executed as the second step-up notice, and reach (super reach) is executed. A notice effect A → B is executed as a first step-up notice, and a notice effect X → Y or X → Y → Z is executed as a second step-up notice, and a pattern that becomes non-reach is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the period from the start of the change of the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is T1, and the notice effect A is displayed from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing (that is, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T2, and the notice effect of the second step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period from the end timing of X (that is, the start timing of the notice effect Y, the change timing of the notice effect X to the notice effect Y) is T3, and the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect Y of the second step up notice The end timing of the notice effect B (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the notice effect B The period from the start timing of the first step-up advance notice effect C (once in FIG. 86) to the end timing of the second step-up advance notice effect Y (that is, the notice effect Z) is set to T4. Or the start timing of the suggestion effect, the period from the notice effect Y to the notice effect Z or the change timing of the suggestion effect) is T5, the execution period of the suggestion effect is T6, and the end timing of the suggestion effect (that is, the start timing of the notice effect z) ) Until the end timing of the second step-up notice notice Z or the notice effect z (that is, the end timing of the second step-up notice) is T7, and the second step-up notice notice effect Z or notice effect z End timing of the notice effect C of the first step up notice from the end timing (that is, start of the notice effect D The period from the imming and the notice effect D to the change timing of the notice effect D is T8, and from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice to the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (that is, the notice effect E) The period from the start timing of the first step-up notice to the end effect (that is, the first timing) The period until 1 step-up notice end timing) is T10.

  87 to 89 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display. As shown in FIG. 87, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 87 (3-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. Variation of the production symbol is started (3-2), and the variation of the production symbol becomes high-speed fluctuation in the period T1, and the character A210 is used as the announcement effect A in the first step-up notice in the lower area of the display screen of the production display device 9. Appears from the right side of the screen, and the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (3-2). That is, the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display. This is an effect in the period T2. Thereafter, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice. At this time, since the change timing from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y has not yet been reached in the second step-up notice (see FIG. 86), the beetle character 220, which is the notice effect X in the second step-up notice, is displayed. An effect flying from the right side of the screen is continuously executed (3-3). This is an effect in the period T3. After that, while the notice effect B in the first step-up notice is being executed, the timing for changing from the notice effect X of the second step-up notice to the notice effect Y is reached, and the character B211 is moving in the left direction. Furthermore, the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect Y in the second step-up notice (3-4). This is an effect in the period T4. Thereafter, the character B211 disappears to the left of the screen, and the timing for changing from the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the notice effect C is reached, but the notice effect C is not executed, and the notice effect of the second step-up notice is given. Only the effect that the beetle character 220 stops on the tree 200 as Y is continuously executed (3-5). This is an effect in the period T5.

  Thereafter, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second step-up notice (when the notice effect X → Y or the notice effect X → Y → z is executed in the second step-up notice), the beetle insect character 220 is used as the suggestion effect. An effect disappearing behind the tree 200 is executed (3-6). This is an effect in the period T6. When the second step-up effect ends as it is (when the notice effect X → Y is executed in the second step-up notice), the notice effect of the first and second step-up notices is not executed and the display screen is displayed. The off symbol (“146”) is stopped and displayed (3-7). On the other hand, when the notice effect z in the second step-up notice is executed, when the predetermined change timing after the suggestion effect (3-6) is reached, the background expands to the entire area of the display screen. The beetle character 220 is enlarged as the tree 200 is enlarged, and the effect that the beetle character 220 moves around is further executed (3-8). This corresponds to the effect (notice effect z) in the period T7. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice, in which characters A210, B211 and C212 appear simultaneously from the left of the screen is executed (3-9) In addition, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (3-10). This is an effect in the period T8 to T10.

When the notice effect Z is executed in the second step-up notice, the tree 200 is enlarged and the beetle character 220 is enlarged as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen without executing the suggestion effect. to (3-11). This corresponds to the effect (notice effect Z) in the periods T6 and T7. After that, when it becomes non-reach which does not become reach, the shift symbol ("146") is stopped and displayed on the display screen (3-14). On the other hand, after that, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect in which the character A210, the character B211 and the character C212 appear at the same time corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed (3). -12). Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach is generated, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (3-13). This is an effect in the period T8 to T10. When the notice effect A → B of the first step-up notice is set, as shown in (3-9), (3-10), (3-12), (3-13) The reach state is executed without executing the notice effects D and E of the first step-up notice.

  Next, as the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E, as the second step-up notice, the notice effect X → once finished → Z, the movable object notice is the first notice timing and the second notice timing. A specific example of the notice effect performed in step 1 will be described. FIG. 90 shows a notice effect A → B → temporary → D → E as a first step-up notice, a notice effect X → temporarily finished → Z as a second step-up notice, and a moving object notice is a first notice timing and a second notice. It is a timing diagram which shows the notification timing in the specific example of the notification effect performed at a timing.

  As shown in FIG. 90, T21 is a period from the start of the change of the production symbol to the start timing of the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, and the movable object notice, and from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing of the notice effect A (that is, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T22, and the second step up from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period from the end timing of the notice effect X of the notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect Y, the change timing of the notice effect X to the notice effect Y) is T23, and the notice effect Y of the second step-up notice is temporarily ended in FIG. ) From the start timing to the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice (ie, notice performance The period from the start timing of C, the timing from the notice effect B to the change timing of the notice effect C) is T24, and from the start timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice (once in FIG. 90) to the start timing of the movable object notice The period from the start timing of the moving object notice to the end timing of the moving object notice is T26, and the end timing of the notice effect Z of the second step-up notice from the moving object notice end timing (that is, the second step) T27 is a period until the end of the advance notice), and the end timing of the notice effect C of the first step up notice from the end timing of the notice effect Z of the second step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect D and the notice effect C). To the timing of the change in the notice effect D) is T28, and the first step a T29 is the period from the start timing of the notice effect D of the previous notice to the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect E to the notice effect E). The period from the start timing of the notice effect E of the one step up notice to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step up notice) is T30.

  FIGS. 91-92 show a notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as a first step-up notice, a notice effect X → temporary finish → Z as a second step-up notice, and a moving object notice is the first notice timing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notification effect performed at a 2nd notification timing. As shown in FIG. 91, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 91 (4-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started (4-2), the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation in the period T21, and the first step-up notice starts at the first area in the lower area of the display screen of the production display device 9. Character A210 appears as a notice effect A in the step-up notice from the right side of the screen, and an effect that the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (4-2). In addition, an effect that the movable member 78 provided around the display screen of the effect display device 9 operates (the effect that the dragon movable member 78 falls down) is executed as the movable object notice at the first notice timing. (4-2). This is an effect in the period T22.

  Thereafter, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (4-3). This is an effect in the periods T23 and T24. At this time, since the second step-up notice is the notice effect X, the beetle character 220 is hidden behind the shadow (leaf) of the tree, and the second step-up notice is ended. Next, after the timing when the player recognizes that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed (the character C212 does not appear) (4-4), that is, after the elapse of the period T25, the movable object at the second notice timing. As a notice, an effect in which the movable member 78 operates (an effect in which the dragon movable member 78 falls down) is executed (4-5). This is an effect in the period T26. Further, as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, corresponding to the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice, an effect is executed in which the tree 200 is enlarged and the beetle character 220 is enlarged (4). -6). This is the effect in period T27. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect in which character A210, character B211 and character C212 appear at the same time, corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice, is executed (FIG. 92 (FIG. 92)). 4-7)). Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, an effect in which the character D213 appears is executed as a notice effect E in the first step-up notice (4-8). This is an effect in the period T28 to T30. For example, when the notice effect A → B is selected as the first step-up notice and the notice effect X is selected as the second step-up notice, the effects corresponding to (4-6) to (4-8) are naturally given. The reach production is executed without being performed.

  Next, a specific example of the notice effect in which the notice effect A → B → temporary end → D → E, the notice effect as the second step up notice is not executed, and the other system liquid crystal notice is executed as the first step up notice will be described. To do. FIG. 93 is a specific example of the notice effect in which the other stage liquid crystal notice is executed without executing the notice effect as the second step-up notice without performing the notice effect as the second step up notice as the first step up notice. It is a timing diagram which shows notice timing.

  As shown in FIG. 93, a period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice is T31, and the end timing of the notice effect A from the start timing of the first step-up notice (that is, the notice effect) The period from the start timing of B, the timing from the notice effect A to the change timing of the notice effect B) is T32, and the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice (ie A period from the start timing of the notice effect C and the change timing of the notice effect B to the notice effect C) is T33, and the other system liquid crystal notice is displayed from the start timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice (temporarily ended in FIG. 93). The period up to the start timing is T34, and the first step from the start timing of the other system liquid crystal notice. T35 is a period from the end timing of the notice effect C of the preview (which once ends in FIG. 93) (that is, the start timing of the notice effect D, the change timing of the notice effect C to the notice effect D), and the notice of the first step-up notice The period from the start timing of the effect D to the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E) is T36, and the first step up notice The period from the start timing of the previous notice effect E to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T37.

FIGS. 94 to 95 show the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as the first step up notice, no notice effect as the second step up notice, and the notice effect where the other system liquid crystal notice is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific example. As shown in FIG. 94, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (FIG. 94 (5-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The change of the effect symbol is started (5-2), the change of the effect symbol becomes a high-speed change in the period T31, and the first step-up notice starts at the first area in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9. character A210 appeared from the right of the screen as the announcement attraction a in the step up with the subject (5 -2), and go to the left of the screen. This is an effect in the period T32.

  Thereafter, when the change timing of a predetermined step comes, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (5-3), and goes to the left screen. This is an effect in the period T33. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character flying from the right does not appear. Thereafter, after the timing when the player recognizes that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed (the character C212 does not appear) (5-4), that is, after the elapse of the period T34, As the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, the tree 200 expands, and an effect is also performed in which the cicada character 221 on the tree 200 is also expanded (5-5). Or, as another aspect of the other system liquid crystal notice, an effect is performed in which the tree 200 expands as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, and the stag character 222 perched on the tree 200 also expands. (5-6). The other system liquid crystal notice effect corresponds to the effects (5-5) and (5-6). This is an effect in the period T35. Then, if there is a shift without occurrence of reach, the shift symbol (“146”) is stopped and displayed on the display screen as it is (5-7). On the other hand, when the notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, the effect in which the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 appear simultaneously is executed ( 5-8). Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, the character D213 appears as a notice effect E in the first step-up notice (5-9), and the characters are gathered in the center. Then, in order to execute the predetermined reach state effect thereafter, the characters gathered at the center disappear. This is an effect in the periods T36 and T37. For example, when the notice effect A → B is selected as the first step-up notice, the reach effect is executed without performing the effects corresponding to (5-8) to (5-9). become.

Next, a specific example of the mail notice will be described. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the mail notice. As shown in FIG. 96, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (FIG. 96 (6-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. When the variation of the production symbol is started (6-2), the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation and the start timing of the e-mail notice, the mail reception operation in the e-mail notice is performed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 Then, “Mail display content 230”, “Operation button display content 231” and “Please open the mail by pressing the button!” Are displayed (6-3). Thus, it is notified that the mail has been received, and the operation button 120 is prompted to operate. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or when a predetermined period has elapsed when no operation is performed), the mail is opened and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit ( 6-4). In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “Intense heat”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (6-4), the contents displayed in the letter are “...” that is not very likely to be a big hit, “chance” that is more likely to be a big hit than “...”, There may be a plurality of types of effects such as “extreme heat” with high possibility. In this case, to determine whether to perform one of the representation embodiment, for example, whether big hit, or whether reach, or the effect is produced setting table data are different depending on whether super reach or not provided in the case of out The effect mode may be selected from the data based on a predetermined random number. At this time, when the data of the production mode setting table is determined to be a big hit in the pre-determined, the determination value of the random number is distributed so that “super heat” can be selected more easily than when it is determined to be out of place. In addition, determination values of random numbers are distributed so that “...” Is not easily selected.

  Next, a specific example of card notice will be described. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of card notice. As shown in FIG. 97, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 97 (7-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. When the variation of the production symbol is started (7-2), when the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation and the start timing of the card notice, the operation of the card appearance in the card notice is performed near the center of the display screen of the production display device 9 Then, the characters “card display content 235”, “operation button display content 231” and “turn the card by pressing the button!” Are displayed (7-3). As a result, it is notified that a card has appeared and prompts the operation of the operation button 120. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time when no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235 written on the card is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit (7 -4). In this example, since the display content 235 of the card is “chance”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (7-4), the contents displayed on the card may be provided with the same production mode as the above-described mail notice. In this case, similarly to the mail notice, an effect form setting table for card notice may be provided, and the effect form may be selected in the same manner as the mail notice.

  Next, notice effect A → B → temporary end → D → E as the first step up notice, no notice effect as the second step up notice is executed, and notice that the first mail notice is executed at a later timing as the mail notice. A specific example of the production will be described. FIG. 98 shows the notice effect A → B → temporary end → D → E as the first step-up notice, no notice effect as the second step-up notice is executed, and the first mail notice is executed at a later timing as the mail notice. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of a notice effect.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice is T41, and the end timing of the notice effect A from the start timing of the first step-up notice (that is, the notice effect) The start timing of B and the period from the notice effect A to the change timing of the notice effect B are T42, and the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice (that is, the end timing (ie The period from the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect B to the notice effect C) is T43, and the mail is sent at a later timing from the start timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice (temporarily ended in FIG. 98). T44 is the period up to the notice start timing The execution period is T45, the execution period of the mail opening effect in the mail notice is T46, the end timing of the notice effect D from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice effect (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the notice The period from the effect D to the notice effect E change timing) is T47, and the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice (that is, the first step up notice) The period until (end timing) is T48.

  99 to 100, the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as the first step up notice, no execution of the notice effect as the second step up notice, and the first mail notice as the mail notice at a later timing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notification effect performed. As shown in FIG. 99, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 99 (8-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the effect symbol is started (8-2), the variation of the effect symbol becomes a high-speed variation at T41, and the character A210 appears as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice (8-2). This is an effect in the period T42. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character 220 flying from the right does not appear. Thereafter, when the predetermined step change timing is reached, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (8-3). This is an effect in the period T43. Thereafter, after the timing at which it is possible to recognize that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed, that is, after the elapse of the period T44, “Mail display content 230”, “operation button display content 231” and “Please open the mail by pressing the button!” Are displayed (8-4). This is an effect in the period T45. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or when a predetermined period has elapsed when no operation is performed), the mail is opened and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit ( 8-5). This is an effect in the period T46. In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “Intense heat”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. Thereafter, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, an effect for causing the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 to appear is executed as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (8-6). Then, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, an effect of causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (FIG. 100 (8-7)). This is an effect in the periods T47 and T48. For example, when the notice A → B is selected as the first step-up notice, the reach effect is performed without performing the effects corresponding to (5-8) to (5-9). Become.

  Next, notice effect A → B → end once → D → E or A → B → C → D → E as first step up notice, no notice notice effect as second step up notice, card notice as card notice A specific example of the notice effect that is executed at an early timing will be described. FIG. 101 shows a notice effect A → B → end once → D → E or A → B → C → D → E as a first step up notice, no notice notice effect as a second step up notice, card as a card notice It is a timing diagram which shows the notification timing in the specific example of the notification effect performed at an early timing of the notification.

  As shown in FIG. 101, T51 is a period from the start of the change of the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice, and the end timing of the notice effect A from the start timing of the first step-up notice (that is, the notice effect). The period from the start timing of B, the timing from the notice effect A to the change timing of the notice effect B) is T52, and the period from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the start timing of the early card notice is T53. The period from the start timing of the card notice to the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect C to the notice effect C) is T54, and the first step up Card notice from start timing of notice effect C (or once) The period until the end timing of the execution period of the card appearance effect is T55, the execution period of the card release effect in the card notice is T56, and the notice effect D is determined from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice effect. The period from the end timing (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E) is T57, and the notice effect of the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice. The period until the end timing of E (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T58.

  102 to 103 show a notice effect A → B → temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E as a first step-up notice, no execution of notice effect as a second step-up notice, card It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect produced when a card notice is performed at an early timing as a notice. As shown in FIG. 102, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 102 (9-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started (9-2), the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation in the period T51, and when the start timing of the first step-up notice comes, the character A210 is used as the notice effect A in the first step-up notice. Appears (9-2). This is an effect in the period T52. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character 220 flying from the right does not appear. Thereafter, when the predetermined step change timing is reached, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (9-3). This is an effect in the period T53. Then, during the execution of the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, as the operation of the card appearance in the card notice, “card display contents 235” and “operation button display” are displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The characters “content 231” and “please turn the card by pressing the button!” Are displayed (9-4). This is because the early timing is selected as the appearance timing of the card notice, and the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as the first step up notice, and the notice effect as the second step up notice is executed. None, at the late timing described in the notice effect executed at the late timing of the first mail notice as the mail notice, the card notice appears after the execution of the notice effect B ends. This effect is an effect in the period T55. When the probability of a big hit is high, in response to the player operating the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time if no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235 written on the card (this example) Then “chance”) is displayed, and the possibility of a big hit is announced (FIG. 103 (9-5)). When the possibility of super reach is high, in response to the player operating the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time if no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235 (this is written on the card) In the example, “Super” is displayed, and the possibility of super reach (subsequent big hit) is notified in advance (9-6). This is an effect in the period T56.

  Note that the notice is executed by rotating the card during a period in which the notice effect C in the first step-up notice can be executed. That is, the player can recognize that the card notice is generated during the execution period of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice, but the player can actually confirm the result of the card notice in the notice effect of the first step-up notice. It becomes after the period when C can be executed. This is because during the execution period of the notice effect B, the player does not know whether or not the notice effect C will be executed. This is because even if the result is displayed, the player may not pay attention. By displaying the notice result of the card notice at a timing after the player recognizes that the change to the notice effect C is not performed, the player pays attention to the notice contents of the card notice, and the notice effect is further enhanced. Become effective. Furthermore, even if the player does not change to the notice effect C at the present time of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice, the player has a sense of expectation that a notice that increases the possibility of a big hit by the card notice may be given. It can be recognized at an early timing and it can be interesting. Unlike the notice effect Z and z of the second step-up notice and other system liquid crystal notices, this card notice is not executed on the full screen, so the notice effect C is not executed as the first step-up notice. Even if it is the pattern (9-5) or the pattern (9-6) in which the notice effect C is executed, it can be executed simultaneously (this is the same for the mail notice. As the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → Temporary end → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the card notice is early as the card notice See the notice effect performed at

  Thereafter, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, an effect of causing the character A210, the character B211 and the character C212 to appear is executed as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (9-7). Then, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach is generated, an effect of causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (9-8). This is an effect in the periods T57 and T58. For example, when the notice effect A → B is selected as the first step-up notice, the reach effect is executed without performing the effects corresponding to (9-7) to (9-8). become.

  Next, notice effect A → B → end once → D → E or A → B → C → D → E as first step up notice, no notice notice effect as second step up notice, card notice as card notice A specific example of the notice effect that is executed at an early timing will be described. FIG. 104 shows the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E or A → B → C → D → E as the first step up notice, no execution of the notice effect as the second step up notice, and the card as the card notice. It is a timing diagram which shows the notification timing in the specific example of the notification effect performed at an early timing of the notification.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice is T61, and the end timing of the notice effect A from the start timing of the first step-up notice (that is, the notice effect) The period from the start timing of B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T62, and the period from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the start timing of the e-mail notice is T63. The period from the start timing to the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect C to the notice effect C) is T64, and the notice of the first step up notice Email opening in the email notice from the start timing of production C (or once) The period from the start timing of the e-mail notice to the end timing of the e-mail notice is set to T66, the period from the start timing of the e-mail opening in the e-mail notice to the end timing of the e-mail notice, and the notice effect of the first step-up notice effect The period until the start timing of D is T67, and the end timing of the notice effect D from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E) The period from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T69. .

  105 to 108 show the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E or A → B → C → D → E as the first step-up notice, no notice effect is executed as the second step-up notice, card It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice effect produced when a card notice is performed at an early timing as a notice. As shown in FIG. 105, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 105 (10-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started (10-2), and the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation in the period T61. Appears (10-2). This is an effect in the period T62. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character 220 flying from the right does not appear. Next, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, and “mail display content 230” and “operation” are performed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the mail reception operation in the notice of mail. “Displayed contents 231” and “Please open the mail by pressing the button!” Are displayed (10-3). This is an effect in the periods T63 and T64. The valid period of the operation button 120 for the mail notice continues until the notice effect C can be executed.

  When the player operates the operation button 120 at an early timing with respect to the displayed mail notice, the mail is opened at an early timing, and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed (FIG. 106 (10-4)). )). That is, in the first step-up notice, the notice result of the mail notice can be displayed while the notice effect B is being executed. In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “continue step-up”, it is possible to recognize in advance that the step-up notice will continue (change), and the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. This is an effect when the operation button 120 is pressed in the period T64. Then, the character C212 appears as the notice effect C in the first step-up notice while displaying the notice result of the mail notice (10-5). This is an effect in the period T65 to T67. Thereafter, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, an effect of causing the characters A, B, and C to appear is executed as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (10-6), and the right symbol (“ 7 ") is stopped and reach occurs, an effect for causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (10-7). This is an effect in the periods T68 and T69.

  On the other hand, when the player does not readily operate the operation button 120, the e-mail is not opened (FIG. 107 (10-8)), and is the timing at which it can be recognized that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed? (10-9), or until the timing at which the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is executed (the timing at which the character C212 appears) (10-11). This is an effect in the periods T64 and T65 when the operation button 120 is not pressed in the period T64 and the operation button 120 is pressed in the period T65. Even at this time, the validity period of the operation button for the mail notice continues. In response to the operation of the operation button 120 after recognizing that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed, the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed (10-10). This is an effect in the periods T66 and T67. On the other hand, even if the operation button 120 is operated after recognizing that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is executed, the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed (10-12). This is an effect in the periods T66 and T67. In this case, the notice result of the mail notice is displayed during the period in which the notice effect C can be executed. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and the effect of causing the characters A, B, and C to appear as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed (FIG. 108 (10-13)). After “7”) is stopped and reach occurs, an effect of causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (10-14). This is an effect in the periods T68 and T69.

  In this way, the step-up notice and the e-mail notice can appear at the same time, and the valid period of the operation button for the e-mail notice is a period of a plurality of steps of the step-up notice (the execution period of the notice effect B and the execution of the notice effect C). If the player wants to know the notice result of the e-mail notice as soon as possible, the e-mail is sent during the notice effect B during which the notice effect C cannot be recognized by operating earlier. If you want to know the notice result of the e-mail notice after recognizing whether it changes to the notice effect C, you can recognize the notice result of the notice, do not operate until the timing when the notice effect C is executed, For example, even if you are disappointed once without changing to the notice effect C, the probability of a big hit may increase depending on the notice result of the mail notice. It is possible to maintain the feeling. Therefore, since the notice effect suitable for the player can be executed according to the player's preference, the interest can be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing according to a predetermined order during one variable display. The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are notified step by step to indicate that there is a possibility of a big hit, and the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are variably displayed. Since it is configured to be able to be executed simultaneously during the same period, a plurality of step-up notice effects (first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect) can be executed simultaneously to improve the interest. it can.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines the notice effect type to which the notice effect belongs to one of a plurality of kinds, and executes the notice effect to be executed from among the notice effects included in the determined notice effect type. To decide. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design change of the notice effect determination, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game by executing various notice effects without increasing the program capacity, and a specific notice effect is executed. It is possible to improve the work efficiency when it is desired to change the distribution ratio. In particular, if the screen position for executing the notice is the same or there is a notice effect using the same accessory, if it is configured to determine which of them will be executed as the notice type, the notice effect screen It is possible to prevent the execution position and the above-mentioned function from overlapping.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect at a predetermined change timing and the second step at a timing different from the change timing in the first step-up notice effect. Since the control for changing the notice effect in the up notice effect is executed, the change timing of the notice effect in the plurality of step up notice effects is different. A game can be performed while expecting the occurrence, and further enhancement of interest can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to execute control to change the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect at a predetermined timing after the first step-up notice effect is finished. Therefore, even if one step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect) ends, the other step-up notice effect (second step-up notice effect) may continue to be executed. The expectation for the big hit can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 101 executes control for changing the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect (for example, control for changing the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z and z), the effect is given. Since the display area for displaying the preview image on the display device 9 is configured to be enlarged, the player can be impressed with the continuation of the second step-up notification effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes the first step-up notice effect in the first display area (lower display area) of the effect display device 9, and the second step-up notice effect is an effect display. When the control is executed in the second display area (background display area) of the device 9 and the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect is changed, the second display area is the first display. Since it is expanded over the area, the continuation of the second step-up notice effect can be further emphasized to the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 can simultaneously execute the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect during the same period during variable display, and the first or second step-up notice. At least one step-up notice effect (the second step-up notice effect in the above embodiment) of the effects is executed as a notice pattern, after the notice effect (for example, notice effect Y) is executed, and then the notice effect ends. An end suggestion effect (for example, an effect in which a beetle hides in a tree) is executed, a first pattern for ending a notice based on a step-up notice effect and a notice effect (for example, a notice effect Y) are executed, and then an end suggestion effect A second pattern for executing a predetermined next notice effect (for example, notice effect Z) without executing, and a notice effect (for example, notice effect) ) After executing, it performs a termination suggested effect, a third pattern, at least three types of notice pattern is provided to perform the following announcement attraction predetermined thereafter (e.g. announcement attraction z). According to such a configuration, a plurality of step-up notice effects (a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect) can be executed simultaneously to improve interest. In addition, it is possible to make an interest about whether or not the next notice effect (for example, notice effect z) continues after execution of the end suggestion effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to execute the second step-up notice effect at a higher rate than the first step-up notice effect. Specifically, comparing the first notice setting table for determining the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 68 with the second notice setting table for determining the second step-up notice shown in FIG. More judgment values are assigned to each effect mode in the second notice setting table than in the first notice setting table (conversely, the first notice setting table has more judgments for “none”. A value has been allocated.) According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the second step-up notice effect in which the end suggestion effect can be executed can be increased, and the player can be surely interested in the end suggestion effect, Variations of the second step-up notice effect can be increased by the end suggestion effect.

  In this embodiment, the execution period of the end suggestion effect includes a first recognition timing at which the player cannot recognize whether the next notice effect (notice effect C) is executed in the first step-up notice effect, This is a period including both timings of the second recognition timing at which the player can recognize that the next notice effect (notice effect C) is not executed. Specifically, in the specific example in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice shown in FIGS. 87 to 89 are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display, the character is used as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice. B211 appears (FIG. 87 (3-3)), the character B211 passes (FIG. 87 (3-4)), and the character B211 disappears from the screen (FIG. 87 (3-5)). At this point, the player does not know whether or not the next notice effect C will be executed. This time is the first recognition timing. Thereafter, when the character C212 does not appear even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the player can recognize that the next notice effect C is not executed (FIG. 88 (3-6)). This time is the second recognition timing. In this embodiment, the execution period of the end suggestion effect is a period including the first recognition timing and the second recognition timing. According to such a configuration, when the notice ends in the first step-up notice effect, the possibility that a next notice effect (for example, notice effect z) is newly executed after the end suggestion effect is maintained is maintained. It is possible to improve the interest by maintaining the player's expectation for the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the notice effect performed in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect is an effect using a notice image (character image) displayed on the effect display device 9. Yes, the first step-up notice effect is executed in the first display area (display area at the bottom of the screen) of the effect display device 9, and the second step-up notice effect is displayed in the second display area (background background) of the effect display device 9. Since it is configured to be executed in the display area), even if a plurality of step-up notice effects are executed at the same time, the player can easily recognize and not be confused.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 moves the movable member 78 provided in the game area in addition to the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect). Can be executed to notify that there is a possibility of winning a big hit, and the change in the notice effect (notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect in the above embodiment) is possible. When the control to change to the next notice effect is not executed despite the arrival of the timing, the movable object notice effect is executed after the change timing (the effects shown in FIGS. 91 and 92). Example). According to such a configuration, the moving object notice effect is performed after the step-up notice effect appears to have ended once, so that the player's expectation can be held again, and the interest is further improved. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the effect control CPU 101 executes the movable object notice effect, the notice effect (notice effect D) next to the notice effect (notice effect C) that has not been executed in the first step-up notice effect. ), The first step-up notice effect is restored when the movable object notice effect is continuously executed even if the first step-up notice effect appears to have ended. Can maintain the expectation for the occurrence of jackpots and improve the fun of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 can be a big hit by executing a notice effect different from the notice effect that can appear in the executed step-up notice effect (for example, the first step-up notice effect). The other system notice effect (for example, other system liquid crystal notice effect) that notifies that there is a possibility can be executed, and reach is performed when control to change to a specific notice effect (for example, notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect is executed. The effect control CPU 101 determines that the state is to be established, and the specific advance notice is the next advance notice effect even though the change timing of the specific advance notice effect (notice effect C) is reached in the step-up advance notice effect. Configured to execute other system notice effect after change timing when control to change to effect is not executed Are (directed example shown in FIG. 94, FIG. 95). According to such a configuration, it is determined that the reach state is established when the control for changing to the specific notice effect (notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect is executed, so that the step-up notice effect is temporarily ended. The other system notice effect is executed after pretending to be, and it can regain the expectation for the occurrence of the reach state of the player, and the interest can be further improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the effect control CPU 101 executes the other system notice effect (other system liquid crystal notice effect), the next notice of the notice effect (notice effect C) not executed in the step-up notice effect is performed. Since it is configured to execute the effect (notice effect D), even if the step-up notice effect is finished, the step-up notice effect may be restored due to the continuous execution of the other system notice effect. , The expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the reach state is reached after the other system notice effect (other system liquid crystal notice effect) is executed, the specific reach state (super reach state) that is likely to result in a specific display result. It is preferable that Specifically, in the notice effect setting process, the presence / absence of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is determined in S587 regardless of the content of the received change pattern command. However, the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern of the super reach is determined. Only when a command is received, the process of S587 is executed. According to such a configuration, the expectation of a big hit when another system notice effect occurs can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation button 120 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect control CPU 101 receives a big hit according to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player in addition to the step-up notice effect. The button notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that the notice effect may occur can be executed, and the change timing of the notice effect (for example, notice effect C) has been reached in the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect). When the control for changing to the next notice effect is not executed, the button notice effect is executed after the change timing (example shown in FIG. 96, example shown in FIG. 97). According to such a configuration, the button notice effect that can be executed based on the operation of the operation button 120 is executed after the player is made to recognize that the step-up notice effect has once ended, and the player expects the big hit. Can hold for a long time. Further, when the big hit occurs, the step-up notice effect is once finished, so that it is possible to strongly give the impression that the big hit has been generated by one's own power, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes the notice effect (notice effect D) next to the notice effect (notice effect C) that has not been executed in the step-up notice effect after executing the button notice effect. (Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, examples of effects shown in FIGS. 102 and 103), even if the step-up notice effect appears to have ended, a notice is given by operating the operation button 120. The production can be recognized as if it was newly revived, and the fun of the game can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, the operation effective period (button effective period) in which the operation of the operation button 120 is effective is the execution period of the notice effect (notice effect B) executed before the button notice effect is executed. Since this is the period (examples shown in FIGS. 102 and 103), the player can operate the operation button 120 at his / her favorite timing, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation button 120 that can be operated by the player is provided, and the effect control CPU 101 provides a specific display result according to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player in addition to the step-up notice effect. The button notice effect can be executed to notify that there is a possibility, and the step-up notice effect and the button notice effect can be executed simultaneously during the same period during variable display. In the up-notice effect (first step-up notice effect), the first recognition timing at which the player cannot recognize whether the next notice effect (notice effect C) will be executed, and the player the next notice effect (notice effect C). ) Is a period including both timings of the second recognition timing in which it is possible to recognize that it is not executed (examples of effects shown in FIGS. 105 to 108). According to such a configuration, when the player operates the operation button 120 at the first recognition timing, the player can recognize whether or not the notice effect (notice effect C) is changed at an early stage. When the operation button 120 is operated at the recognition timing, a sense of expectation can be given again depending on whether or not the button notice effect is executed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of effects (button notification effects and card notification effects) are provided in advance as the button notification effects, and the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the plurality of types of button notification effects. Because it is configured to be executed, the variation of the button notice effect increases, and the fun of the game is improved.

  In this embodiment, the notice effect (second step-up notice effect and button notice effect) that is not executed simultaneously during the same period during variable display is classified according to the notice effect type (see FIG. 67). There is no need to set data for prohibiting each other (for example, the distribution rate is set to 0), and data setting is facilitated.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is determined that the reach state is established when the control for changing to the specific notice effect (notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect is executed, and the operation of the operation button 120 is effective. The effective operation period is a period that spans the execution period of the specific notice effect and the execution period of the notice effect that was executed before the specific notice effect is executed. It will extend over both periods of the period in which the state is confirmed, and the player can operate the operation button 120 in both states with different situations to execute the notice effect, thereby improving the interest. it can.

  In this embodiment, in the first step-up notice effect, the first notice effect (when the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R) ( After the execution of the notice effect A), the identification information is derived and displayed in the first stop variable display portion (left symbol display area 9L) from which the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. In the second step-up notice effect, the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R). The first notice effect (notice effect X) starts to be executed at the first stop variable display portion (left symbol display area 9L) where the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. Identification information is derived and displayed Since the final notice effect (notice effect Z, z) is executed before the final notice effect (see FIG. 78), the final notice effect (notice effect E, e, notice effect) in a plurality of step-up notice effects. By varying the execution timing of Z, z), it is possible to feel the expectation of the big hit, and further, it is possible to reduce the step-up notice effect after the first stop, making the player pay attention to the display result of the identification information be able to.

  In this embodiment, in the first step-up notice effect, the first notice effect (when the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R) ( The execution of the notice effect A) is started, and the variable display portion (right symbol display area) other than the third stop variable display portion (middle symbol display area 9C) from which the identification information is finally derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. 9R), the final notice effect (notice effect E, e) is executed after reaching the reach state in which the identification information is derived and displayed and constitutes a part of the combination of the specific display results. In the step-up notice effect, the execution of the first notice effect (notice effect X) is started when the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R), Multiple variable In the state where the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display portion (right symbol display area 9R) other than the third stop variable display portion (middle symbol display area 9C) from which the identification information is derived and displayed last. Since the final notice effect (notice effect Z, z) is executed before reaching the reach state (see FIG. 82), the final notice effect (notice effect E in a plurality of step-up notice effects is provided. , E, different notice timings Z, z), it is possible to increase the expectation of a big hit, and after the third stop, the step-up notice effects can be reduced, and the player is given identification information. It is possible to focus on the display result.

  In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number based on the determination result of whether or not to reach the jackpot determination determination result, and the variation A variation pattern is determined from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type using a random number for pattern determination. Then, if it is determined to be reach, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the reach state, and a variation pattern with a plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type according to the reach state is determined. Decide either. Further, when it is determined not to reach, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types corresponding to the non-reach state is determined, and a plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type corresponding to the non-reach state are accompanied. Determine any of the fluctuation patterns. According to such a configuration, without causing an increase in program capacity, not only when reaching the reach state, but also when not reaching the reach state, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by executing various effects, Further, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when it is desired to change the distribution rate at which a specific variation pattern is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if it is not controlled to the big hit state and is not controlled to the reach state, the specific effect (pseudo ream, slip) corresponding to the specific variation pattern is executed, so The expectation for occurrence can be improved.

  78, 80 to 82, etc., the execution start timing of the first step-up notice and the execution start timing of the second step-up notice effect are the same, but may be different timings.

  Also, the change timing of each notice effect A, B, C, D, E, e in the first step-up notice effect and the change timing of each notice effect X, Y, Z, z in the second step-up notice effect Although the timing is different, the timing may be the same. For example, the notice effect X changes from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y at the timing when the notice effect A changes to the notice effect B, and changes from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z and z at the timing when the notice effect B changes to the notice effect C. You may comprise.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the production | presentation which makes a person appear on the display screen of the production | presentation display apparatus 9, or makes a beetle appear is performed as the production | presentation aspect of a 1st step-up notice effect and a 2nd step-up notice effect. Although the case has been shown, the effect mode of each step-up notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in either one of the first step-up notice effect or the second step-up notice effect, an effect of moving a movable object such as the movable member 78 or the effect blade accessory 79a, 79b may be executed. Further, in both the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect, an effect of moving a movable object such as the movable member 78 and the effect blades 79a and 79b may be executed.

  In addition, it is preferable that each of the notices shown in the above embodiments can execute a plurality of kinds of notice modes (effect modes of notice effects) in the notice. For example, in the first step-up notice, the notice effect A includes a plurality of different kinds of notice effects A1, A2, A3... (For example, the color of clothes of the character A is different). Further, the movable object notice and the effect blade accessory notice include a plurality of different movable aspects (movable speed, movable range, number of movements, etc.) as the movable aspects of the movable member 78 and the effect blade accessory 79. In addition, button notifications include multiple types of display content (for example, "...", "chance", "super reach", etc., multiple types of different characters, display colors even if the display content is the same) Are different, etc.). In addition, the frame lamp notice includes a plurality of types of light emission modes (light emission speed, light emission color, etc.) as light emission modes. In addition, the mini character notice includes different appearances of different mini characters and different mini characters. The other-system liquid crystal preview includes a plurality of types of preview images (for example, seminar images and stag images) as the preview images displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Thus, any one of the production modes included in the predetermined notice is selected and executed.

  In the above embodiment, in the step-up notice, the execution rate of the notice and the notice mode (the notice effect) are determined depending on which variation pattern is out of non-reach, normal reach, super reach, or big hit. The appearance rate is changed, but a notice setting table is provided for each variation pattern, and the notice value is changed according to the content of the probability change pattern. You may make it change a rate and the appearance rate of a notice aspect. For example, when the variation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or slip, the execution rate of the step-up notification or the appearance rate of a predetermined notification mode may be improved.

  In addition, in the notices other than the step-up notice, the presence / absence of the notice and the appearance rate of the notice form (effect form of the notice effect) are changed depending on whether or not it is a big hit. A plurality of different notice setting tables are provided, and a plurality of different allocations are determined according to the determination result of the predetermining means (out-going or big hit, or the type of big hit in the case of big win) or the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means Any one of the notice setting tables may be selected, and the notice form to be executed may be determined based on the selected table and the notice determination random number. By configuring in this way, depending on the type of jackpot when it is a big hit in advance, execution of each notice depending on whether it will reach even in the event of a loss, and whether it will develop into a super reach at the time of reach The rate and the appearance rate of the notice mode can be determined. Further, when the variation pattern executes a special effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip, it is possible to improve the notice execution rate and the appearance ratio of a predetermined notice mode.

  In the present invention, the step-up notice effect means that a notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step from a single step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order can be executed. This refers to an effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are more stages than when the display result is not used.

  In the first step-up notice effect, execution of the first notice effect (for example, notice effect A) is started when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, and a plurality of variable display parts are displayed. After the identification information is derived and displayed in the first stop variable display section (for example, the left symbol display area 9L) from which the identification information is first derived and displayed, the final notice effect (for example, the notice effects E and e) is displayed. Change (that is, after the identification information is derived and displayed in the variable display section of the first stop), in the second step-up notice effect, When the identification information is variably displayed on the variable display portion, the first notice effect (for example, the notice effect X) is started, and the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. 1 stop variable Before the identification information is derived and displayed in the display part (for example, the left symbol display area 9L), the final notice effect (for example, the notice effect Z, z) is changed (that is, from the notice effect Y to the notice effect Z, z). The change timing is before the identification information is derived and displayed on the first stop variable display, in other words, after the identification information is derived and displayed on the first stop variable display. There is no change timing of the notice effect in the effect).

  Also, in the first step-up notice effect, when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, the execution of the first notice effect (for example, notice effect A) is started, and a plurality of variable display parts The identification information is derived and displayed on a variable display portion (for example, the right symbol display area 9R) other than the last stopped variable display portion (for example, the middle symbol display area 9C) from which the identification information is finally derived and displayed. Change to the final notice effect (for example, notice effect E, e) after reaching the reach state constituting a part of the combination of the specific display results (that is, the change timing from the notice effect D to the notice effect E, e). In the second step-up notice effect, when the identification information is variably displayed on all variable display portions, the first notice effect (for example, notice effect) ) Is started and changes to the final notice effect (for example, notice effects Z, z) before reaching the reach state (that is, before the change timing from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z, z becomes the reach state). In other words, there may be no change timing of the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect after reaching the reach state).

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the second step-up notice effect is developed up to the same number of steps “3”, as shown in FIG. More judgment values are assigned to the jackpot than in the case of developing to step (z). Therefore, when developing to the effect of step (Z), a big hit expectation degree is large compared with the case where it develops to step (z). Therefore, even if it develops to the production | generation of the same number of steps, a player's interest can be given to which production of which step (Z) and step (z) develops. .

  In this embodiment, the “big hit expectation (reliability)” indicates the appearance rate (probability) that a big hit appears when a step advance notice is executed at a certain stage during the step-up notice effect. . For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when step X during the step-up notice effect is executed is (determined that step X is executed in the step-up notice effect when it is determined as a big hit) / (decided as a big hit The ratio determined when step X is executed in the step-up notice effect is calculated for both the case where it is determined and the case where it is determined to be lost.

  In this embodiment, referring to the notice type determination table shown in FIG. 67, when the notice type is determined to be the second step-up notice effect or the button notice effect, and the notice type is determined to be the button notice effect, Referring to the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 71, the button notice effect mode is determined as none, mail notice, or card notice, but is not limited to this, and the notice type is determined in the notice type determination table. , The second step-up notice effect, the mail notice, or the card notice are allocated, and the mail notice effect mode is none, the first mail notice effect (early timing), the first mail notice effect ( Late timing), second email notice effect (early timing), or second email notice effect (late timing) A notice setting table and a card notice setting table that is allocated to any of the card notice effect (early timing) or the card notice effect (late timing). Is determined as an e-mail notice effect, one of the e-mail notice effects is determined with reference to the e-mail notice setting table, and when the notice type is determined as a card notice effect, the card notice setting table is referred to. Then, any one of the card notice effect modes may be determined.

  Further, the execution timing of each notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. FIG. 109 is a timing chart showing a first modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. 109 differs from the content shown in FIG. 78 in that a button notice (email notice, card notice) of another system different from the step up notice (first step up notice, second step up notice) is provided. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 109, also in the mail notice of other systems, similar to the mail notice described above, it is notified that the mail has been received, prompts the operation button 120 to be turned on, and responds to the operation of the operation button 120. Open the mail and notify the contents of the mail. However, the timing at which the other-system mail notice is executed is the time before step (B) in the first step-up notice ends. By executing the e-mail notice at such timing, it is presumed that the first step-up notice has ended in step (B), and then the other-system e-mail notice is executed, and then the first step-up notice step ( By executing D), it is possible to make the first step-up notice appear to have been restored. Further, in the mail notice of another system, the button valid period during which the operation of the operation button 120 is valid is a period including the execution period of the notice effect (notice effect B) executed before the button notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player can operate the operation button 120 at his / her favorite timing, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

  Also, in the card notice of other systems, similar to the card notice described above, the card is displayed, the operation button 120 is operated (ON), the card is released according to the operation button 120 operation, and the card is written on the card. Announce the contents. However, the timing at which the other-system card notice is executed is the time before step (B) in the first step-up notice ends. By executing the card notice at such timing, it is presumed that the first step-up notice has ended in step (B), then the card notice of another system is executed, and then the step ( By executing D), it is possible to make the first step-up notice appear to have been restored. Furthermore, in the card notice of another system, the button valid period during which the operation of the operation button 120 is effective is a period including the execution period of the notice effect (notice effect B) that was executed before the button notice effect was executed. Therefore, the player can operate the operation button 120 at his / her favorite timing, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

  FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing a second modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. 110 differs from the content shown in FIG. 109 in that a button notice (e-mail notice, card notice) of another system different from the step-up notice (first step-up notice, second step-up notice) is provided. This is that the button valid period in the system button notice spans step (B) and step (C) in the first step-up notice.

  Specifically, step (B) in the first step-up notice is executed, and the timing at which the player cannot yet recognize whether step (C) is executed (in the example shown in FIG. 110, step (C) At a timing earlier than the time after the start of the execution period and before a short time elapses), an e-mail notice or a card notice is started by notifying e-mail reception or displaying a card. In this embodiment, since the operation of the operation button 120 is validated from the time when the notification of mail reception or the display of the card is performed in the email notice or the card notice, the button valid period starts from that point. Further, the timing at which the player can recognize that step (C) in the first step-up notice is not executed (in the example shown in FIG. 110, the time after a short time has elapsed from the start of the execution period of step (C). Thereafter, the notification of the content of the mail or the notification of the content written on the card is terminated. When the notification of the contents of the mail or the notification of the contents written on the card is ended, the button valid period is ended.

  In this way, the button valid period of the button notice is determined by the timing at which the player cannot recognize whether step (C) is executed in the first step-up notice (first recognition timing) and the player at step (C). When the player operates the operation button 120 at the first recognition timing by setting a period including both timings at which it is possible to recognize that is not executed (second recognition timing), the step (C ) Can be recognized, and when the operation button 120 is operated at the second recognition timing, a sense of expectation can be given again depending on whether or not the button notice is executed. Interest can be improved.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110, when the player presses the operation button 120 at a timing at which the player has not yet recognized whether or not the step (C) is executed, the mail is opened or the card at that time. To release. Therefore, the player steps at an early stage (before step (C) is executed) based on the contents of the opened mail and the contents of the opened card (whether or not the process proceeds to step (C)). Whether or not to change to (C) can be recognized. Also, as shown in FIG. 110, when the player presses the operation button 120 after the timing at which the player can recognize that step (C) is not executed, the mail is opened or the card is opened at that time. Do. Therefore, even if the player does not change to step (C), based on the content of the opened mail and the content of the opened card (whether there is a chance of winning or will develop into super reach) It is possible to recognize whether a big hit opportunity or super-reach development will be performed, and to give the player a sense of expectation again.

  FIG. 111 is a timing diagram showing a third modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. In the example shown in FIG. 111, the last step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (Z) or (z), is stopped on the left design (first stop design that stops first). It ends before the right symbol (second stop symbol that stops second) stops later. On the other hand, the step (C) in the first step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (C) is continued even after the right symbol is stopped, and the step (D), step (E) or (e), that is, the notice effect (D). And the notice effect (E) or (e) can be executed even after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and reach occurs. According to such a configuration, after the middle symbol is stopped, the step-up notice effect can be reduced (one), and the player can be focused on the stop symbol (middle symbol) of the effect symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine provided with two special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 8a and second special symbol indicator 8b) as a variable display unit is taken as an example. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a special symbol display.

  In each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output lamp 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the like, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine may be a slot machine. This slot machine can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game media, and variably displays a plurality of types of winning identification information that can identify each of them. A game machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived on the variable display unit for use and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived on the variable display unit for winning, wherein the variable for winning Prior determination means for winning that determines whether or not to allow each of a plurality of types of winnings including a specific winning accompanied by a transition to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player before the display result of the display unit is derived A winning derivation control means for controlling the winning variable display section to derive a display result in accordance with a determination result of the winning predetermination means, and a specific winning display result for the specific winning is a variable for winning. Specific game state control means for controlling to the specific game state when derived to the display unit, a variable display unit for display that variably displays a plurality of types of display identification information that can be distinguished from each other, and the variable for display Transition to a state advantageous to the player (for example, big bonus, AT / CT / RT / ART, etc.) when the display result of the effect identification information on the display unit becomes a predetermined special display result A suggestion effect means that suggests that the condition is satisfied, and an effect pre-decision means that determines whether or not to make the special display result before the display result of the effect identification information is derived and displayed, Based on the determination result of the predetermining means for effect, the notice effect determining means for determining a notice effect to be executed from among a plurality of notice effects that notify that there is a possibility of the special display result, and the notice A prediction effect execution means for executing a prediction effect determined by the output determining means, in which the player and an operation unit operable.

  In the slot machine, the notice effect determining means determines the notice effect belonging to which notice effect type among a plurality of kinds of notice effect types classified based on the aspect of the notice effect. Determining means, and notice determining means for determining the notice effect to be executed among the notice effects belonging to the notice effect type determined by the notice type determining means, wherein the plurality of notice effects are the effects In a stepwise manner, the special display result may be obtained by changing the effect one or more times at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one variable display of the identification information for use. There is a possibility that the special display result will be obtained based on the operation of the operation means during the step-up notice effect to be notified and the variable display of the effect identification information once. Configured to include an operation announcement attraction for notifying the door. According to this, the notice type determining means determines which notice effect belonging to the notice effect type among a plurality of kinds of notice effect types classified based on the kind of the notice effect, and the notice determining means Since the notice effect to be executed is determined from among the notice effects belonging to the determined notice effect type, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when it is desired to change the distribution rate at which the specific notice effect is executed.

  Further, in the slot machine, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the effect identification information is set to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the special display result is not made by the prior determination unit. The variation determination type to which the variation pattern of the production identification information belongs is selected based on at least one of the determination result of the reach determination unit and the determination result of the advance determination unit or the determination result of the reach determination unit. A variation pattern type determining unit for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determining unit for determining a variation pattern of the effect identification information from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination unit, Corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern determining means, at least a variation performance including a variation display of the effect identification information. A variation demonstration execution means for executing, may be configured with. According to this, the variation pattern type determining means determines which variation pattern type to be executed among the plurality of types of variation pattern types, and the variation pattern determining means determines the determined variation pattern type. Since the variation pattern to be executed is determined from among the variation pattern effects belonging to, the work efficiency in the case where it is desired to change the distribution ratio at which the specific variation pattern is executed can be improved.

  Further, in the slot machine, the variation pattern determining means is determined not to be the special display result by the effect predetermining means, and is determined not to be controlled to the reach state by the reach determining means. Based on the above, the variation pattern type is determined to be a variation pattern type to which a specific variation pattern for executing a predetermined specific effect belongs, and the variation pattern determination unit is configured to determine the variation pattern type determined by the variation pattern type determination unit. The variation pattern may be determined from the specific variation patterns included in the variation variation execution means, and the variation effect execution unit may execute the specific effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit. . According to this, even if it is not controlled to the specific gaming state and is not controlled to the reach state, the specific effect (pseudo-run, slip) corresponding to the specific variation pattern is executed, so the occurrence of the specific gaming state The expectation for can be improved. Further, the variation pattern type determining means determines which of the plurality of types of variation pattern types the specific variation pattern belonging to is to be executed, and the variation pattern determining means specifies the identification belonging to the determined variation pattern type. Since the specific variation pattern to be executed is determined from the variation patterns, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when it is desired to change the distribution rate at which the specific variation pattern is executed.

  Further, in the slot machine, when it is determined that the generation of the specific winning is permitted by the award predetermining means, and the specific winning display result is not derived to the variable display for winning, the generation of the specific winning is permitted. You may have the carry-over means to carry over the determination to the effect after the next game. In such a configuration, even if the specific winning display result is not derived to the winning variable display unit, the decision to allow the specific winning is carried over after the next game. This can prevent the player from losing money.

  Further, in the slot machine, the notice effect may be performed by the effect variable display unit, or may be performed by another device (for example, a display device, a movable member, etc.) different from the effect variable display unit. May be. When the variable display of the production identification information and the announcement production are executed by the same production variable display unit, the display becomes complicated, the announcement production is difficult to recognize, and the player may be confused. Therefore, when the notice effect is configured to be performed by another device (for example, a display device, a movable member, etc.) different from the effect variable display unit, the player can easily recognize the notice effect. An effect can be obtained.

  In the slot machine, the period from the start of the variable display of the production identification information by the production variable display control means until the display result is derived and displayed may be one game or less. It may be performed in a long period.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation button 120 is provided to change the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9, but in the slot machine, the variable display of the winning identification information is stopped. The operation target for the purpose and the operation target for changing the display of the effect image may be realized by the same operation means. That is, the display of the effect image may be changed in accordance with an operation performed on the operation means provided to stop the variable display of the winning identification information. In such a configuration, in the gaming machine (that is, the slot machine) that stops the variable display of the winning identification information in accordance with the operation performed by the player, the operation button 120 or the like is used to change the display of the effect image. There is no need to provide it.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball apparatus 9a 1st decoration design display 9b 2nd decoration Symbol display 18c Total hold memory display 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
78 Movable members 79a, 79b Production vanes (a kind of movable members)
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU

Claims (2)

Identification that is advantageous for the player when a specific display result predetermined as the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit that displays the display result by variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other. A gaming machine that controls the gaming state,
Pre-decision means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed;
Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern of identification information based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
Based on the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means, a notice effect determining means for determining the notice effect to be executed from among a plurality of notice effects that inform the possibility of being controlled to the specific gaming state;
A notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect determined by the notice effect determining means,
The notice effect determining means is a notice type determining means for deciding which of the notice effect types to be executed among the plurality of kinds of notice effect types classified based on the aspect of the notice effect. A notice determining means for determining the notice effect to be executed from among the notice effects belonging to the notice effect type determined by the notice type determining means,
The plurality of the notice effects are the notice effects that perform a plurality of effects from the first stage effect to the multiple stage effects according to a predetermined order, and controlled to the specific gaming state. Includes a step-up notice effect in which the effect is performed up to a predetermined stage effect at a higher rate than when not controlled to the specific gaming state,
The step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect in which a plurality of effects performed in the step-up notice effect are a first aspect, and a plurality of effects aspects performed in the step-up notice effect. Including a second step-up notice effect that is a second aspect different from the first aspect,
When the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are controlled to the specific gaming state, the ratio of the effect to the stage determined in advance is different,
The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed in parallel during variable display of identification information,
The notice effect determining means is:
Determining the step-up notice effect based on the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means,
In the case where the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is the first specific variable display pattern, when the first step-up notice effect is determined, the effect performed in the first step-up notice effect is determined. First restriction means for restricting selection of the first stage or higher as the stage;
When the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is the second specific variable display pattern, when the second step-up notice effect is determined, the effect performed in the second step-up notice effect is determined. look including a second limiting means for limiting the second stage or more selected as the stage,
Gaming machine, characterized in that the timing at which the first step-up announcement attraction stages the timing of change of the second step-up announcement attraction step is changed are different. A gaming machine according to claim 1,
At least one of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect The method is characterized in that the stage can be changed even after reach has occurred. Technician.

Images